SPECIFICATION of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings
Kennedy Park Reception Project (project name)
11 Storkey Street, Marewa, Napier, New Zealand (project address)
Napier City Council (client)
Project Ref: 1535
Date: 10 January 2016 FOR BUILDING CONSENT APPLICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1220 PROJECT1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS1234 DOCUMENTATION1235 SHOP DRAWINGS1237 WARRANTIES1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE1240 ESTABLISHMENT1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT1270 CONSTRUCTION2110 DEMOLITION WORKS3820 CARPENTRY4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS5151 INTERNAL TRIM5230 INTERIOR DOORS5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING6512 CARPET TILES6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS7430 DRAINAGE7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
3578
11131518222429333640454954596473788287909397
100105109114117122124126132137140142145151
1220 PROJECT
This general section describes the project including:
� A description of the work � Site description, features and restrictions � Design parameters for design by contractor � Archaeological discovery
1 GENERAL
Read all general sections together with all other sections.
Description of the work
1.1 READ ALL SECTIONS TOGETHER
The project is to provide a new single story building to provide reception, administration and staff facilities at Kennedy Park, Napier. Part of the building falls under NZS 3604 and the taller reception part is subject to specific engineering design. Demolition of part of an existing building has to take place to allow the new building to proceed, and the existing building will be removed later to make way for a new car park under a separate contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORK
This project does not include Restricted Building Work.
Site
1.3 NO RESTRICTED BUILDING WORK
1.4 SITE
The site consists of: a flat area with existing buildings as shown on drawing no.
drawing 1535GA.10
The site of the works, the street address and the legal description are shown on the drawings. 1.5 LEGAL DESCRIPTION
1.6 EXISTING BUILDINGS
Existing buildings consist of:
a two story timber framed building being used to provide reception and administration facilities
Refer to drawing(s) no(s):
1535 GA.10 New Site Plan
The following are the network utility services: 1.7 EXISTING SERVICES
Electrical: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.16 Telecommunication: Water: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.17 Stormwater: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11 Foul water: as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11
Site environment - Wind
1.8 SITE FEATURES
The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, Table 5.4 Determination of wind zone, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone.
Site environment - Durability
1.9 WIND DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
Building wind zone Medium / 37 m/s (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4)
The exposure zone is to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability, 4.2 Exposure zones and NZBC E2/AS1.
Site environment - Seismic
1.10 EXPOSURE ZONE
The site zone is: Zone C Medium
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1220 PROJECT Page 3
The zone is to NZS 3604, Section 5 Bracing design, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand.
Archaeological discovery
1.11 EARTHQUAKE ZONE - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
The earthquake zone is: Zone 3
Report the finding of any fossils, antiquities and other items of value, to the Contract Administrator. All to remain undisturbed until approval is given for removal. Pre-1900, items or evidence of human activity on the site, come under the Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga Act 2014. If such items or evidence is discovered work must stop immediately and the Contract Administrator must be notified immediately. The site may be classified as an Archaeological Site under the Act, and the Contract Administrator or Owner must contact the Heritage New Zealand for authority to proceed. Post-1900 items remain the property of the owner, pre-1900 items may remain the property of the owner or the Crown subject to what is found.
1.12 ANTIQUITIES AND ITEMS OF VALUE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1220 PROJECT Page 4
1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS
This general section relates to interpretation and definitions that are used in this specification.
1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
Required: Required by the documents, the New Zealand Building Code or by a statutory authority.
Proprietary: Identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue or reference number.
Provide and fix: "Provide" or "fix" or "supply" or "fix" if used separately mean provide and fix unless explicitly stated otherwise.
Review: Review by the contract administrator is for general compliance only. Review does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes. Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.
Working Day: Working Day means a calendar day other than any Saturday, Sunday, public holiday or any day falling within the period from 24 December to 5 January, both days inclusive, irrespective of the days on which work is actually carried out.
Contract Administrator:
1.2 PERSONNEL
Owner: The person defined as "owner" in the New Zealand Building Code. Principal: The person defined as "principal" in the conditions of contract. Contractor: The person contracted by the principal to carry out the contract.
The person appointed by the principal to administer the contract on the principal's behalf. Where no person has been appointed by the Principal, it means the Principal or the Principal's representative.
The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification: 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AS Australian Standard AS/NZS Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc. BCA Building Consent Authority BRANZ Building Research Association of New Zealand BS British Standard CSIRO Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation HERA Heavy Engineering Research Association LBP Licensed Building Practitioner MBIE Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment (includes the old DBH) MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc NZBC New Zealand Building Code NZS New Zealand Standard NZS/AS Joint New Zealand/Australian Standard NZTA New Zealand Transport Agency (previously TNZ) NUO Network Utility Operator PS1 Producer Statement – Design PS2 Producer Statement – Design Review PS3 Producer Statement - Construction PS4 Producer Statement – Construction Review RBW Restricted Building Work SARNZ Scaffolding and Rigging Association New Zealand Inc SED Specific Engineering Design TA Territorial Authority TNZ Transit New Zealand (Transit New Zealand is now New Zealand Transport
Agency NZTA, some specifications are still prefixed TNZ)
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 5
Words defined in the conditions of contract, New Zealand Standards, or other reference documents, to have the same interpretation and meaning when used in their lower case, title case or upper case form in the specification text.
1.4 DEFINED WORDS
Where the context requires, words importing singular only, also include plural and vice versa. 1.5 WORDS IMPORTING PLURAL AND SINGULAR
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 6
1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
1 GENERAL
Throughout this specification, reference is made to various New Zealand Building Code Compliance Documents (NZBC __), acceptable solutions (__ AS_) and verification methods (__ VM_) for criteria and/or methods used to establish compliance with the New Zealand Building Code. Reference is also made to various standards produced by Standards New Zealand (NZS, AS/NZS, NZS/AS), overseas standards and to listed Acts, Regulations and various industry codes of practice and practice guides. The latest edition (including amendments and provisional editions) at the date of this specification applies unless stated otherwise. It is the responsibility of the contractor to be familiar with the materials and expert in the techniques quoted in these publications. Documents cited both directly and within other cited publications are deemed to form part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited documents.
1.1 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
Documents referred to in the GENERAL sections are:
Building Act 2004 Building Regulations 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 New Zealand Building Code Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga Act 2014 Resource Management Act 1991 Smoke-free Environments Act 1990
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads AS/NZS 3012 Electrical installations - Construction and demolition sites NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3114 Specification for concrete surface finishes NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction Noise
WorkSafe NZ Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry
SARNZ Best practice guideline for scaffolding in New Zealand
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Page 7
1234 DOCUMENTATION
This general section relates to documentation required by the Territorial Authority/Building Consent Authority for compliance with the New Zealand Building Code. It also includes documentation relating to:
� Substitutions � Manufacturers documents
Building Consent Authority documentation
1 GENERAL
Obtain the building consent forms and documents from the owner and keep them on site. Liaise with the BCA for all notices to be given and all inspections required during construction to ensure compliance. Return the consent form and documents to the owner on completion.
1.1 BUILDING CONSENT
It is an offence under the Building Act 2004 � to carry out any work not in accordance with the building consent. � to carry out Restricted Building Work by anyone other than a Licensed Building Practitioner licensed for
that type of work. The resolution of matters concerning building code compliance to be referred to the contract administrator for a direction and then if required to the BCA for consent. Where any alteration is requested by the territorial authority or any other authority, do not undertake such alteration until the matter has been referred to the contract administrator for direction.
1.2 BUILDING CONSENT COMPLIANCE
Provide names and contact details of the contractor's key personnel and tradespersons who are involved with the project. Review the list once a month and reissue it if changes have been made.
Licensed Building Practitioner documentation
1.3 PROJECT PERSONNEL
Provide LBP details. Provide names, LBP numbers, areas of practice and contact information. Provide this information to the BCA before commencing work on the Restricted Building Work in the form required by the BCA. Advise the BCA of any change to an LPB previously advised. Include the following as applicable
� Site LBP � Carpenter � Foundations 1 Concrete foundation walls and concrete slab-on-ground constructor � Foundations 2 Concrete or timber pile foundations constructor � Bricklaying and block laying 1 Brick / masonry veneer � Bricklaying and block laying 2 Structural masonry - Bricklayer / Blocklayer � Roofing 1 Concrete / clay tile roofer � Roofing 2 Profiled metal roofer and/or wall cladding installer � Roofing 3 Metal tile roofer � Roofing 4 Membrane roofer � Roofing 5 Torch on membrane roofer � Roofing 6 Liquid membrane roofer � Roofing 7 Shingle / slate roofer � External plastering 1 Solid plasterer � External plastering 2 Proprietary Plaster Cladding Systems (PPCS) plasterer
Also provide names and contact details of the following
� Registered drainlayer � Registered plumber � Registered gasfitter � Registered electrician
1.4 LICENSED BUILDING PRACTITIONERS
When producer statements verifying construction are required, provide copies to both the Building Consent Authority and the Contract Administrator. Provide producer statements in the form required by the BCA.
1.5 PRODUCER STATEMENTS
Where Restricted Building Work is carried out by a LBP, on completion provide a Record of Work. Provide copies to both the BCA and the Contract Administrator.
1.6 RECORD OF WORK
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 8
Compliance information
Information may be required either as a condition of the contract documents or as a condition of the building consent. It may include the following:
� Applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / supplier � Manufacturer's / supplier's warranty � Installer / applicator's warranty � Producer Statement - Construction from the applicator / installer � Producer Statement - Construction review from an acceptable suitably qualified person
Refer to the general sections for the requirements for compliance information to be provided by the contractor. Refer to the building consent for the requirements for compliance information to be provided by the contractor. Obtain required documents from the relevant parties for delivery to the contract administrator after the final inspection has been carried out by the BCA.
1.7 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE
As soon as practicable after completion of the building work, provide in writing the following information and documentation to the client and the relevant territorial authority. Information and documentation relating to:
� The identity of the building contractor and the subcontractors who carried out the work. � Maintenance requirements for any products incorporated in the building.
If applicable also provide any guarantee or insurance obtained by the building contractor in relation to the building work.
Substitutions
1.8 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED ON COMPLETION
Where a product or material supplier is named in SELECTIONS, the product/material must be provided by the named supplier. Where more than one named supplier, any one of the named suppliers will be acceptable.
1.9 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT/MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
Where specifically stated in a section, substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified systems, components and associated products listed in that section.
1.10 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
A substitution may be proposed where specified products are not reasonably available. A substitution may also be proposed by the contractor where the contractor considers a proposed substitution to be an alternative to the specified product. Except where a specified product is not available, the contract administrator is not bound to accept any substitutions. Where branded work sections are included in this specification, substitution of those products or systems will not be allowed.
1.11 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS
Notify proposed substitution of specified products. Notification to include but not be limited to: � Product identification � Manufacturer's name, address, telephone number, website and email address � Detailed comparison between the properties and characteristics of the specified product and the
proposed substitution � Statement of NZBC compliance including durability � Details of manufacturer warranties
Plus an assessment of:
� Any changes required to the programme including any extension of time required � Any consequential effects of the proposed substitution � Allowance for time and cost for re-design and documentation (if applicable) � Allowance for time and cost for obtaining an amendment to the Building Consent (if applicable) � Any change in cost associated with the proposed substitution
and if requested:
� All current manufacturer's literature on the product � Accreditations and appraisals available � Reference standards � Product limitations � Samples � List of existing installations in the vicinity of the project
1.12 NOTIFICATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 9
The Contract administrator must advise of acceptance of substitutions in writing.
Variations to issued Building Consent
1.13 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTITUTIONS
Where the contractor has sought acceptance of a substitution or a variation which is for the contractor's own convenience and the substitution or variation requires an amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must apply for and obtain the required amendment. The contractor must:
� Obtain approval for substitutions from the contract administrator. � Prepare and provide to the BCA all documentation required for the variation. � Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. � Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans.
1.14 CONTRACTOR VARIATION TO BUILDING CONSENT
Where the principal is proposing a substitution or a variation which requires an amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must provide to the principal information that the contractor has that is required for the amendment. The principal will:
� Prepare and provide to the BCA all documentation required for the amendment. � Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. � Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans.
Manufacturer's documents
1.15 PRINCIPALS VARIATION TO BUILDING CONSENT
Manufacturers and supplier’s requirements, instructions, specifications or details means those issued by them for their particular material, product or component and are the latest edition.
1.16 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUPPLIER’S INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Where manufacturer’s installation, application and execution requirements are referred to in this specification, the Contractor must ensure that are fully aware of this documentation. Whenever necessary obtain and keep on site the relevant latest version of such documentation and make it available to workers carrying out that part of the work
1.17 CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN CURRENT DOCUMENTATION
Documentation including manufacturer’s installation instructions, specification data sheets, producer statements, BRANZ and similar appraisals may be included in the issued Building Consent. These documents have been provided only to demonstrate compliance with the NZBC.
Branded work sections
1.18 DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED FOR BUILDING CONSENT
Branded sections may be included in this specification relating to specific products and systems to be installed as part of the contract works. Where branded sections are included, substitutions to the branded products and systems will not be allowed.
1.19 BRANDED WORK SECTIONS
If any related work is cross referenced to a generic work section, but only the equivalent branded section is included in the specification, use that branded section. Confirm with the contract administrator if there is any doubt.
1.20 CROSS REFERENCED WORK SECTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 10
1235 SHOP DRAWINGS
This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and review of shop drawings as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. Detailed requirements for shop drawings for particular parts of the work are included in the specific work section.
1 GENERAL
Prepare shop drawings where specified in the work sections. Refer to SCHEDULES. 1.1 PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS
Prepare shop drawings at appropriate scales to enable good legibility. Unless otherwise specified in a work section, submit shop drawings in the format as listed in SELECTIONS.
1.2 SHOP DRAWING FORMAT
Allow time in the programme for the preparation, coordination and review of shop drawings. Allow also for such resubmission and further review as may be required prior to fabrication. No extension of time will be allowed for resubmission and further review.
1.3 PROGRAMME FOR SHOP DRAWINGS
Agree and arrange for such direct contact as is appropriate between detailer, consultant and others whose input may be required in the preparation of the shop drawings. Such direct communication does not relieve the contractor of the need to carry out their own coordination and check of shop drawings.
1.4 COMMUNICATION WITH SHOP DRAWING DETAILER
Before submitting the shop drawings for review, carry out coordination to ensure that allowance has been made for all other parts of the work that relate to the work detailed in the shop drawings.
1.5 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor is solely responsible for coordination of shop drawing dimensions with site measurements. The reviewer's dimensional review is limited to visual/aesthetic matters only
1.6 COORDINATION WITH SITE MEASURE
Submit shop drawings to the named reviewers for review, in due time to ensure conformance with the contract programme.
� Where no time is stated in a specific section allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer. Where a large number of drawings are involved more time will be necessary.
� Where no person is named as the reviewer, submit the shop drawings to the contract administrator. Shop drawing review indicates only that the shop drawing interpretation of the design concept has been reviewed without the need for further modification, other than the corrections indicated by the reviewer. The reviewer may advise that:
� The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed; or � The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed subject to notes, annotations or
comments provided; or � The shop drawings have been reviewed and work may proceed subject to notes, annotations or
comments provided. Resubmitted revised shop drawings shall be provided for the record, or � Work may not proceed. Revise and resubmit shop drawings
1.7 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
Review of shop drawings does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the shop drawings, site dimensions, the overall design, coordination and performance, or for ensuring the work is carried out in compliance with the contract documents. It does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes. Review cannot be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.
1.8 RESPONSIBILITY
Reviewed drawings which are required to be resubmitted to correct comments or notations indicating where the shop drawings are at variance with the contract documents, are to be modified and resubmitted to the reviewer for re-review. Allow 5 working days for re-review by the reviewer.
1.9 RESUBMISSION OF SHOP DRAWINGS
Before proceeding with any fabrication, installation or erection, advice must be obtained from the named reviewers that work may proceed. Where no named reviewer has been nominated advice must be obtained from the contract administrator.
1.10 WORK MAY PROCEED
1.11 BIM MODEL
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS Page 11
BIM (Building Information Model) is being used for the construction of the works. Refer to SELECTIONS for details of the BIM model and the information required to be included.
2 SELECTIONS
Submit the shop drawings in the following format 2.1 SHOP DRAWING FORMAT
Format/Size Hardcopy A3 Electronic copy PDF
~ 2.2 BIM (BUILDING INFORMATION MODEL) FORMAT
Schedule of shop drawings
3 SCHEDULES
The following work sections have shop drawing requirements, refer to these sections for details:
3.1 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWINGS
4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS Page 12
1237 WARRANTIES
This general section refers to the requirements for warranties/guarantees as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. It includes:
� Warranties for parts of the work required by the principal in a required form � Installer/applicator warranties for parts of the work in the installer's/applicator's standard form � Manufacturer/supplier warranties provided with products, appliances and the like in the
manufacturer's/supplier's standard form � Guarantees provided by contractor in the contractor's standard form
These guarantees/warranties are in addition to any warranties, implied warranties, or guarantees that are required by the Building Act, the Building Regulations, or the building consent.
Warranties
1 GENERAL
Provide executed warranties in favour of the principal in respect of, but not limited to, materials, components, service, application, installation and finishing called for in that specified section of work. The terms and conditions of the warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability under the terms of the warranty called for in that specified section of work.
� Conform to the WARRANTY AGREEMENT form included in the specification/conditions of contract. � Commence warranties from the date of practical completion of the contract works (unless otherwise
stated). � Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. � Provide executed warranties prior to practical completion.
1.1 PROVIDE WARRANTIES
Where installer/applicator warranties are offered covering execution and materials of proprietary products or complete installations, provide such warranties to the contract administrator. These warranties may be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required provided that these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods. Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.
1.2 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
Where warranties are offered covering materials, equipment, appliances or proprietary products, provide all such warranties to the contract administrator. Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.
Submission
1.3 WARRANTIES - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Obtain the warranties from the installers, applicators, manufacturers and suppliers at the earliest possible date and review to ensure that they are correctly filled out and executed. Where warranties are executed as a deed, ensure that a duplicate copy is provided for execution by the owner/principal. Keep safe and secure until required for submission.
1.4 REVIEW BY CONTRACTOR
Obtain copies of warranties required as a condition of the building consent in the form required for submission to the BCA. Keep safe and secure until required at the time of the BCA final inspection and Code Compliance Certificate.
1.5 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY
1.6 WARRANTIES - REQUIRED BY CONTRACT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237 WARRANTIES Page 13
Obtain copies of warranties listed in the contract documents. Provide all warranties at the same time. If the project has an operations and maintenance documentation provision, present the warranties with the operations and maintenance information. If no operations and maintenance documentation provision exists, present the warranties to the contract administrator in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index suitably labelled and including the project name and details. Provide a title on the binder edge "Warranties for (project name)"
Refer to the contract conditions for any requirement relating to the time for submission for warranties and guarantees. Submit all warranties to the architect no later than the date of the contractor's advice of achieving practical completion.
1.7 WARRANTIES - SUBMISSION NZIA SCC CONTRACT
Weathertightness and watertightness warranty
2 SELECTIONS
A warranty is required from the contractor for a minimum period of 2 years, covering the weathertightness of the complete building envelope and the watertightness of all liquid supply and disposal systems and fittings. This general warranty is in addition to any specific warranties required. Provide this warranty in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of this warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.
� Conform to the standard form WARRANTY AGREEMENT included in the contract documents. � Commence the warranty from the date of Practical Completion. � Maintain its effectiveness for the time stated.
2.1 WEATHERTIGHTNESS AND WATERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY
Schedule of work section warranties
3 SCHEDULES
The following work sections have warranty and guarantee requirements, refer to these sections for details:
3.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK SECTION WARRANTIES
4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils & DPC 4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding 4272C Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System 4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System 4311D Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors 4611ME Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing 4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation 5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops 6411J Jacobsen Vinyl Surfacing 6512 Carpet tiles 6700R Resene Painting General 7123KP KemPex Hot & Cold Water System 7411MA Marley Rainwater Disposal Systems 7701 Electrical Basic 7811 Communications Cabling
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237 WARRANTIES Page 14
1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT
The principal has entered into a contract (the contract) with the contractor for carrying out the contract works. The warranted works / materials are part of the contract works. The contractor has agreed to arrange for the provision of a warranty in respect of the warranted works / materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty. The warrantor has agreed to provide a warranty in respect of the warranted works / materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty.
1 WARRANTY AGREEMENT Contract for: KENNEDY PARK RECEPTION BUILDING (the contract works) Contractor: ~ (the contractor) Principal: NAPIER CITY COUNCIL (the principal) Warrantor: ~ (name of contractor, subcontractor or materials supplier) Warranted works: ~ (the warranted works) Warranted materials: ~ (the warranted materials) Warranty period: ~ years from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
The warrantor warrants to the principal that the warranted work performed /materials supplied shall be as required in the contract. If not specified the work shall be of good trade practice with materials and fittings of merchantable quality. This warranty shall be in addition to and shall not derogate from any manufacturer's warranty or any warranty implied by law, attaching to any part of the warranted works.
2 IT IS HEREBY AGREED
The warrantor agrees that if the warrantor is advised by the principal in writing of any defect in the warranted works / materials within the warranty period for which the warrantor is liable under the terms of this warranty, the warrantor will promptly take steps to remedy the defect / replace defective materials.
2.1 WARRANTOR'S OBLIGATIONS
Any remedial work / replacement of defective materials which the warrantor is liable to undertake / provide under this warranty shall be carried out:
� to the standard required by the contract; and � in a prompt and timely manner; and � without unnecessary inconvenience to any occupants; and � at the warrantor's cost; and � subject to reasonable access being provided to the warrantor for the purpose of carrying out the
remedial work.
2.2 REMEDIAL WORK / REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
Where the cost of replacement of work and/or materials is out of all proportion to the consequences of the defect, or where the defect may not be reasonably capable of rectification without substantial expense which is out of all proportion to the cost of the contract works, the warrantor may:
� where the defect or defective material is reasonably rectified by repair rather than by replacement, the warrantor's obligation under this warranty shall be only to repair or otherwise make good the defect or
� propose reasonable monetary compensation in lieu of remedying the defect or � propose a combination of both repair and compensation.
2.3 REPAIR, REPLACEMENT AND/OR COMPENSATION
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 15
The principal must consider the warrantor's reasonable proposals and the parties must endeavour in good faith to reach agreement. Where agreement cannot be reached the dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the disputes clause in this warranty.
If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily carry out the remedial work or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the remedial work to be carried out by others. If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily provide replacement materials or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the replacement materials to be supplied by others. The principal must first give the warrantor 10 working days notice to carry out and complete the remedial work / supply replacement materials. If the warrantor does not complete this work / supply replacement materials within the time, the principal must then advise the warrantor in writing that the work will be carried out / materials will be supplied by others. In such event the warrantor is not released from obligations under this warranty, which continues in full force and effect, except in respect of the defect remedied / materials supplied by the principal or by another person contracted by the principal. The reasonable cost of the remedial work carried out / materials supplied by such other persons including all reasonable costs of the principal is to be paid to the principal by the warrantor on demand.
2.4 FAILURE BY WARRANTOR TO PERFORM REMEDIAL WORK
The principal agrees that the warrantor is not liable for any defect or damage caused by: � wilful act or negligence of the principal or any person other than the warrantor; or � fire, explosion, earthquake, war, subsidence, slips, faulty materials or workmanship other than caused
by the defect in the warranted work; or � any force of nature which the warrantor could not reasonably foresee; or � any neglect or unnecessary delay by the principal in giving notice to the warrantor of a defect in the
warranted works becoming apparent; or � design faults, errors or discrepancies, unless the warrantor undertook the design of the part of the
warranted works the subject of the defect; or � unintended use of the warranted works by the principal or any occupant thereof; or � failure by the principal or any occupant thereof to maintain the warranted works in accordance with
good practice and any manufacturer's stated or recommended instructions or requirements.
2.5 EXCLUSIONS
The principal may assign the benefit of this warranty to any person. 2.6 ASSIGNMENT
Any dispute or difference between the principal and the warrantor arising out of or in connection with this warranty, or the subject matter of this warranty, including any question about its existence or validity, will be referred to arbitration by a sole arbitrator to be agreed upon by the parties. If the parties are unable to agree upon the identity of an arbitrator within 10 working days from the date upon which notice of the dispute is given, then the arbitrator will be appointed by the Registrar of the Building Disputes Tribunal (NZ) Ltd upon the application of either party.
2.7 DISPUTES
Notices given to the warrantor are deemed to have been effectively served on the warrantor if given in accordance with the contract.
2.8 NOTICES
(And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of:
3 EXECUTED BY
Signed by the warrantor: ………………………………………..……………………... on this: …………….day of ……………………………..…20…… (day) (month) (year)
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 16
(And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of:
NOTE - Where the warrantor is not the contractor the warranty agreement must be executed by the warrantor and the principal in the manner required for execution of a deed. Any of these parties which are a company must execute the warranty by having it signed, under the name of the company, by two or more directors. If there is only one director, it is sufficient if the warranty agreement is signed under the name of the company by that director, but the signature must be witnessed by another person. The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address. Alternatively, companies may execute under power of attorney. Any party which is a body corporate (other than a company) must execute by affixing its seal, which must be attested in the manner provided for in the rules of, or applicable to, the body corporate. In the case of a party who is an individual, the party must sign and the signature must be witnessed by another person. The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address.
Witness signature ……………………………………………………………... Name: ……………………………………………………………... (print) Address: ……………………………………………………………... (print) Occupation: ……………………………………………………………... (print) Signed by the principal: ……………………………………………………………... on this: …………….day of ……………………………..…20…… (day) (month) (year)
Witness signature ……………………………………………………………... Name: ……………………………………………………………... (print) Address: ……………………………………………………………... (print) Occupation: ……………………………………………………………... (print)
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 17
1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
This general section relates to operation and maintenance (O&M) documentation as listed in this section, as referred to within the body of this specification, and as referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. This documentation is required by the principal so that they can operate and maintain the contract works.
Operation and maintenance documents
1 GENERAL
Provide in writing the information and documentation prescribed by regulations made under the Building Act, to the owner/principal and the relevant territorial authority.
1.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION - BUILDING ACT
Provide operation and maintenance documentation necessary to operate and maintain the works. This documentation is to include:
� Contractors name and contact details. � A complete list of subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers noting which portions of
the contract each provided. � A complete list of equipment and appliances including serial numbers, manufacturers' names and
sources of supply. � Copies of all manufacturers' and suppliers' product literature containing maintenance
requirements/instructions, for any products in the building work. � Information for operation and maintenance as required by work sections. Refer to SCHEDULES. � Operation and maintenance manuals as required by work sections. Refer to SCHEDULES. � Maintenance contract proposals as required by work sections. Refer to SCHEDULES. � Final as built documents. � Originals of all warranties and guarantees properly executed. � Other information listed or referred to in this general section. � Operation and maintenance information required by other project documents.
1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Provide details of any maintenance requirements required by the Building Act. In addition provide maintenance requirements for items including:
� Details of suggested building washing programme. � Details of suggested re-painting programme. � Location of flushing points for sub soil drainage systems. � Location of surface water filter systems requiring regular cleaning. � Overflow relief gully location and means of keeping charged.
1.3 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide appliance manuals and operating information for all appliances including details of all isolating valves and switches including:
� Water supply isolating valve. � Location of isolating valves for appliances including dishwasher, clothes washer and fridge with and
icemaker connection. � Gas supply isolating valve. � Electrical main switch and all sub boards. � Location of isolating switches for electrical appliances including cooker and cook top, kitchen extract
system, electric under floor heating. � Fire and heating device operating instructions.
1.4 APPLIANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide equipment and appliance manuals and operating information including details of all isolating valves and switches.
1.5 EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCE MANUALS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide details of actual selections used in the construction of the works including: � Tapware type and supplier details. � Sanitary ware including accessories type and supplier details. � Light fitting type and supplier details. � Door hardware type and supplier details. � Carpet type and colour including underlay and the supplier details. � Vinyl flooring type and colour including supplier details. � Overlay timber floor type and supplier details. � Tile type and supplier details. � Fire supplier details.
1.6 SELECTIONS INFORMATION
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 18
� Aluminium joinery system and finish. � Paint type and colours used.
Include brochures and other information included with the items supplied.
Provide details of any selections used in the construction of the works that are different from what was specified.
Documentation format
1.7 SELECTIONS INFORMATION - SUBSTITUTIONS
Unless otherwise specified in a work section, � Provide O&M drawings at scales appropriate to the detail to enable good legibility. � Provide manufacturers documentation at the original scale. � Provide written text generally in A4 format using a font not less than 10 point.
Submit O&M documentation in both hard copy and as electronic portable document format (PDF) files.
Submission and review
1.8 O&M DOCUMENTATION FORMAT
Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide draft O&M documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the principal takes occupation of the works, whichever occurs first. Submit O&M documentation to the named reviewer for review.
� Where no time is stated in a specific section, allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer. Where a large amount of documentation is involved more time will be necessary.
� Where no person is named in a specific section as the reviewer, submit the O&M documents to the contract administrator.
� Submit a proposed index system (as required for final documentation) to the contract administrator for review.
O&M review indicates only that the reviewer is satisfied that the documents are legible. The review is not a check of the accuracy of the documents, however the reviewer may comment on any aspect of the documentation and require the documents to be revised and resubmitted. Review of operation and maintenance documentation does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the documentation. The reviewer may advise that:
� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and has been accepted without the need for further modification. The information can be included in the final documentation; or
� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and the information can be included in the final documentation subject to revision required by notes, annotations or comments provided; or
� The O&M documentation has been reviewed and is not acceptable, refer to notes, annotations or comments provided. Resubmit corrected/altered documentation for review.
Amalgamate the reviewed accepted and corrected O&M documentation into the final O&M documentation
Final documentation
1.9 O&M DOCUMENTATION SUBMISSION & REVIEW
Prior to the end of the defects notification/liability period, provide complete O&M documentation in both hardcopy and electronic form.
1.10 SUBMISSION OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
Provide the hard copy version of the O&M documentation in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index identifying operation and maintenance documents, requirements, manuals, operating instructions and selections. In addition include the project name, contractor's name and the date of practical completion on the index page. Include indexed sections to identify all operation and maintenance manuals that are not contained within the binder. Provide a copy of the front cover or other identifying feature of the manual within the section with a note stating "this manual has been provided separately". Provide a title on the binder edge "Operation and maintenance instructions for (project name)". If more than one binder is required identify each binder by number and ranking (e.g. Volume 2 of 3) and group information logically between the binders for ease of reference.
1.11 FINAL O&M DOCUMENTATION - HARDCOPY
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 19
Provide operation and maintenance manuals clearly and neatly marked on the spine or front cover so as to identify the project name. Where operation and maintenance manuals are a collection of loose leaf documentation, provide documentation in a loose-leaf binder as described above.
Provide a copy of all hardcopy information in PDF format arranged in logical named folders. In addition provide DWG files of documentation if available.
1.12 FINAL O&M INFORMATION - ELECTRONIC COPY
The contract administrator may review the final documentation and require alteration and resubmission. 1.13 REVIEW OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
O&M Documentation
2 SELECTIONS
Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator. Provide two hardcopy sets of completed O&M documentation to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation. The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records. Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.
2.1 FINAL DOCUMENTATION - INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator. Provide two hardcopy sets of completed maintenance manuals to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation. The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records. Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.
Maintenance contract proposals
2.2 FINAL DOCUMENTATION - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide maintenance contract proposals to the contract administrator no later than the date of Practical Completion. Provide in electronic and hardcopy form.
2.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT PROPOSALS
Schedule of information for operation and maintenance
3 SCHEDULES
The following work sections have information for operation and maintenance requirements; refer to these sections for details:
Schedule of operation and maintenance manuals
3.1 SCHEDULE OF INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding 4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System 5311F Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems 5313F Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops 6700R Resene Painting General
There are no work section requirements.
Schedule of maintenance contract proposals
3.2 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
There are no work section requirements.
Schedule of additional items
3.3 SCHEDULE OF MAINTENANCE CONTRACT PROPOSALS
3.4 SCHEDULE OF ADDITIONAL ITEMS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 20
The following documents have operation and maintenance requirements, refer to these documents for details: ~
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 21
1240 ESTABLISHMENT
This general section relates to site establishment including:
� Notices and approvals � Inspections � Site preparation � Signage � Temporary construction
Notices and approvals
1 GENERAL
Comply with all statutory obligations and regulations of regulatory bodies controlling the execution of the works.
1.1 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS
Attend on Building Consent Authority officers, statutory and network utility inspectors, as necessary to obtain approvals (in addition to building consent approval) for and the satisfactory completion of, the works.
1.2 BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY AND NETWORK UTILITY APPROVALS
Notify all network utility operators of proposed works before commencing site operations. Ascertain location of services or confirm that none exist in the vicinity of the works. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing services.
Inspections
1.3 NOTIFY NETWORK UTILITY OPERATORS
~
Site preparation
1.4 CARRY OUT INSPECTIONS
Access to the site is limited to: ~ 1.5 SITE ACCESS
Limited to the following designated working areas on the site: ~
1.6 WORKING AREA
Carry out all investigations necessary and peruse all information available to determine ground conditions and likely ground performance both on the site and adjacent to it. Also refer to the territorial authority project information memorandum (PIM).
1.7 SITE AND SOIL SURVEYS
Refer to the soils investigation report included with this specification.
Existing buildings
1.8 GROUND CONDITIONS
Control access and working areas within existing buildings. Liaise with building owner to establish site limitations.
1.9 ALTERATIONS
Liaise with the building owner to arrange access to areas of the existing building which are not normally part of the contract.
Signage
1.10 TEMPORARY ACCESS
Obtain approval for, provide and erect a timber framed sign board ~mm x ~mm fully painted and displaying: � Title of contract � Principal's name � Contractor's name � Consultants as listed in general section 1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL � If the contractor wishes, names of contractor and subcontractors.
1.11 SITE SIGN
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 22
Temporary construction
Provide as necessary all temporary roads, tracks, crossings and hard standing required for the efficient execution of the works and maintain to approval.
1.12 TEMPORARY ROADS
Provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, lunch rooms, sanitary accommodation and other temporary buildings required for storage, management of the works, for the use of workers while on site and as required by Acts and Regulations.
1.13 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
Provide temporary accommodation and facilities for site meetings and for use by consultants while on site. 1.14 CONSULTANTS TEMPORARY SITE OFFICE
Provide temporary fencing, hoardings, planked footways, guard rails, gantries and lighting as necessary to protect the public and others, for the proper execution of the works and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.
1.15 HOARDINGS, GANTRIES, LIGHTING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 23
1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This general section relates to project management requirements including:
� Meetings � Cost control � Communicating and recording � Programming � Health and safety
Site Meetings
1 GENERAL
Meetings to normally be held: Fortnightly The following persons to attend:
� Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Designer � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Services consultants when needed � Subcontractors when needed (contractor to inform them).
1.1 SITE MEETINGS
Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~
The contract administrator is to keep full minutes of all site meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 3 working days. The minutes are to record
� Documentation and information issued and required � Directions and variations issued � Confirmation of contract insurances � Programme � General business � Site health and safety � Payment claim processing including costing variations
Project Control Group (PCG) meetings
1.2 SITE MEETING MINUTES
1.3 PCG MEETINGS
Frequency: Monthly Convenor: Project manager / Principal
The purpose of PCG meetings is to: � To consider matters arising from the regular site meetings that fall outside of the scope of those
meetings. � To address issues relating to project delivery including quality, programme and cost.
1.4 PURPOSE OF PCG
The following persons to attend: � Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Other consultants
1.5 PCG ATTENDANCE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 24
1.6 VENUE PCG
Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~
The following reports are required to be presented at site meetings: Contract administrator:
1.7 PCG REPORTING
A report on matters addressed at the site meetings Contractor: A detail status report Quantity surveyor: A Detail status report
The designated person is to keep full minutes of all PCG meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 5 working days.
Design meetings
1.8 PCG MINUTES
1.9 DESIGN MEETINGS
Frequency: Monthly Convenor: Design manager
The purpose of design meetings is to: � To consider matters arising from design by the contractor in relation to parts of the work being carried
out on a design build or performance specification basis by the contractor � To review and assess design aspects of such work on other designed parts of the work � To provide value engineering advice on parts of the work where design changes are required or are
being considered to meet the project financial performance requirements
1.10 PURPOSE OF DESIGN MEETINGS
The following persons to attend: � Principal � Contract administrator � Project manager � Contractor � Architect � Engineer � Quantity surveyor � Other consultants
1.11 DESIGN MEETING ATTENDANCE
1.12 VENUE OF DESIGN MEETINGS
Meeting place: ~ Time: ~ Day: ~
The designated design manager is to keep full minutes of all design meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 5 working days.
Reporting
1.13 DESIGN MEETING MINUTES
Where required a Contractors detailed status report is to address the following: � A progress performance report based on the current contract construction programme addressing
actual progress against programme of all activities and any variance from the programme. � Details of measures being taken to get work back on programme where there has been a delay. � Details of any future events that will or are likely to affect compliance with the programme. � Variation report including progress on agreed variations, variations to be agreed and anticipated
variations and the time implication of variations. � Procurement progress on parts of the work being undertaken under a monetary allowance including the
time by which direction must be given on monetary allowances to conform with the construction programme.
� Details of any discrepancies in the contract documents that require clarification or determination. � A list of information requests by the contractor, the date when they were made, the person who they
were directed to and the date by which a response is required. � A report on compliance with the issued Building Consent and any parts of the work that have not been
1.14 CONTRACTORS DETAILED STATUS REPORT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 25
passed by the BCA inspector. � A report on compliance with the issued Resource Consent and any compliance issues. � A report of site health and safety including any notifiable incidents.
Where required a quantity surveyors detailed status report is to address the following:
� A report on actual cash flow compared with planned cash flow � Variation costing and the adjusted contract price � Monetary allowance review of sums not yet directed for expenditure by the contractor � An assessment of the cost of known and potential variations � An updated project budget including known and projected costs plus an allowance for contingent and
unknown costs.
1.15 QUANTITY SURVEYORS DETAILED STATUS REPORT
Where required a consultants detailed status report is to address the following:
� A report on construction quality compared to specification and other performance requirements. � Identification of items or parts of the work where there are or may be quality compliance issues with
respect to the issued Building Consent � Identification of items or parts of the work where there are or may be quality compliance issues with
respect to the ability of the consultant to issue any required producer statement.
Cost control
1.16 CONSULTANTS DETAILED STATUS REPORT
Give reasonable notice to the contract administrator before covering up work which requires to be measured. 1.17 MEASUREMENT
To be signed by the contractor's representative as confirming the labour, times and materials used, before being supplied to the contract administrator.
Communicating and recording
1.18 DAYWORK VOUCHERS
Communications between the parties shall be as follows: - 1.19 MEANS OF COMMUNICATION
Directions: In writing delivered by email with a copy by post or hand Meeting minutes: In writing delivered by email RFI's: (Requests for information) by email or in writing to the contract
administrator
Communications must be: - � delivered to the addressee by hand; or � posted to the postal address stated in the Project Directory; or � delivered to the street address as stated in the Project Directory; or � sent by email to the email address stated in the Project Directory; or � sent by facsimile to the fax number stated in the Project Directory.
The Principal, Contractor and the Contract administrator must notify the others if they change their address for delivery or transmission of communications.
1.20 DELIVERY OF COMMUNICATIONS
Ensure all records specified are kept, held and collated on site in a form that makes the information easily accessible when it is needed. Distribute copies as and when necessary to those persons entitled under the contract to that information.
1.21 RECORDS
Take digital photographs from positions agreed with the contract administrator at specified frequency and provide copies to the contract administrator.
Programming
1.22 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
Frequency: Monthly Copies required: 1 set colour prints not less than postcard size 1 electronic copy delivered on disk or by email
1.23 CONTRACT PROGRAMME
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 26
Include the proposed sequence of all significant on-site and off-site activities, including any intermediate key dates mentioned in the contract. Identify the critical path. Provide a tabulated schedule of information for each activity in order of:
� brief description � duration in suitable time unit � earliest start and latest finish time � total float � key dates for the supply of information or materials by others.
Identify the dates by which particular information, material or plant need to be supplied or arranged by the contract administrator. Also identify any constraints which may have been imposed by the programme. Supply copies of the programme to the following:
Monitor the contract programme by:
� recording progress regularly on the site chart � informing the contract administrator promptly of any circumstances affecting any part of the programme
structure and timing � reviewing the programme once a month making alterations as needed and agreed to and re-issuing the
required copies.
Contract administrator 1 Architect 1 Designer 1 Owner 1 Quantity surveyor 1 Site supervisor 1
Work on site is not restricted. Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and noise and nuisance controls.
1.24 WORKING HOURS
Work on site is restricted to:
Work outside these hours may be permitted, but 24 hours notice is required in writing to the contract administrator before proceeding. Obtain any necessary permits and permission for such work.
Health and safety
1.25 WORKING HOURS RESTRICTIONS
Weekdays: ~ Saturdays: ~ Sundays: ~ Public holidays: ~
Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992. Comply with all relevant New Zealand safety legislation. Take all practical steps to make the site and the contract works safe and to provide and maintain a safe working environment. Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the rules governing site safety, are properly supervised and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards. Identify any significant hazards. Maintain proper procedures for dealing with any emergencies that may arise. Immediately investigate accidents, identify their cause and maintain a register of accidents and serious harm. Provide a copy of any report which the contractor is required to make to a public authority on any accident which is associated with carrying out the contract works and results in serious harm to any person. Refer to individual work sections for detailed requirements on this project.
1.26 HEALTH AND SAFETY
On the request of the contract administrator, acting on reasonable grounds, suspend any identified hazardous activities and proceed to eliminate, isolate or minimise them in order to comply with the Act, without prejudice to any other rights of the principal under the contract.
1.27 SUSPENSION OF HAZARDOUS WORK
Appoint a suitably qualified site safety person to co-ordinate site safety and to attend all site meetings. 1.28 SITE SAFETY PERSON
1.29 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 27
Prepare and submit to the contract administrator before commencing work on site a health and safety plan. Include in that plan all people on site and the general public, as well as the following items and any other necessary item:
� identification of existing and potential construction hazards and risks � safety procedures to eliminate, isolate or minimise construction hazards � the equipment to be used to minimise the hazards � the maintenance of a register of hazards for the site � the name and qualifications of the site safety person � emergency procedures � first aid facilities and safety equipment � the methodology for notifying, recording and investigating accidents and injuries.
Keep a copy of the plan in the site office
Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety plan. 1.30 COMPLY WITH SITE SAFETY PLAN
Inform employees and others on the site of: � hazards they may be exposed to while working � hazards they may create while working which could harm others � how these hazards may be minimised � emergency procedures � the location of first aid facilities and safety equipment.
1.31 INFORM EMPLOYEES OF HAZARDS
Comply with: � Relevant New Zealand safety legislation including "Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995". � WorkSafe NZ publications including "Guidelines for the provision of facilities for general safety in the
construction industry". � Relevant codes of practice, guides, guidelines and standards.
Until further regulations are made under the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 to cover them, the enactments repealed by the Act continue in force until revoked.
1.32 HEALTH AND SAFETY REGULATIONS, CODES AND GUIDES
Do not use explosives except with the written approval of the territorial authority/WorkSafe NZ. Comply with their safety requirements and use construction blasters holding a current certificate of competence issued under the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.
1.33 EXPLOSIVES
Powder-actuated fastening tools to be used only by workers holding current certificates of competence in their name, issued under the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.
1.34 POWDER-ACTUATED FASTENING TOOLS
Do not smoke on site except in a designated location, in accordance with the Smoke Free Environments Act 1990. This location to be determined by the contractor with the agreement of the contract administrator.
1.35 SMOKE FREE REQUIREMENTS
Do not: � light rubbish fires on the site � bring dogs on to or near the site � bring radios/audio players on to the site.
1.36 RESTRICTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 28
1270 CONSTRUCTION
This GENERAL section relates to common requirements for construction issues including: - � Quality assurance � Noise and nuisance � Set out � Common execution requirements � Common materials requirements � Supply of spare materials � Common requirements for samples and tests � Final presentation and cleaning � Commissioning
Quality control and assurance
1 GENERAL
Carry out and record regular checks of material quality and accuracy, including: � Concrete quality and finish. � Dimensional accuracy of structural column locations (following completion of foundations). � All perimeter columns and frames for plumb. � Levels of all floors relative to the site datum. � Framing timber moisture content.
Where any material, quality or dimension falls outside specified or required tolerances, obtain written direction from the contract administrator. Where building consent approval is affected, confirm remedial action with the Building Consent Authority. Provide all materials, plant, attendances, supervision, inspections and programming to ensure the required quality standards are met by all project personnel.
Noise and nuisance
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Minimise the effects of noise generation by including in the planning of the work such factors as placing of plant, programming the sequence of operations and other management functions. Limit construction noise to comply with the requirements of NZS 6803, the requirements of the Resource Management Act sections 326, 327 and 328 and the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations clause 11.
1.2 LIMIT CONSTRUCTION NOISE
Refer to NZS 6803 Tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3 for the upper limits of construction work noise in residential and industrial areas over the various time periods, particularly 0730 to 1800 hours. Note also the allowed adjustments and exemptions in NZS 6803, 6. Do not exceed these limits.
1.3 ACCEPTABLE NOISE LEVELS
Provide information to neighbours of any noise generation from the site liable to constitute a problem. Explain to them the means being used to minimise excessive noise and establish with them the timings most suitable for the noise generating work to be carried on. Discuss with any complainant the measures being used to minimise noise. Where possible modify these measures to accommodate particular circumstances. Finally, determine the sound level at the location under discussion using methods and observation reporting as laid down in NZS 6803. If the noise level is above the upper limits of NZS 6803, tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3, cease the noise generating operation and remedy the problem.
1.4 PROVIDE INFORMATION TO NEIGHBOURS
As well as complying with the preceding clauses comply with the following on this contract: ~
1.5 ADDITIONAL NOISE CONSTRAINTS
When the works are to be carried out in or around occupied premises, ascertain the nature and times of occupation and use. Carry out the works in a manner to minimise inconvenience, nuisance and danger to occupants and users.
1.6 INCONVENIENCE TO OTHERS
Remove dirt and droppings deposited on public or private thoroughfares from vehicles servicing the site to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and the contract administrator.
1.7 DIRT AND DROPPINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 29
Take all precautions to prevent damage and nuisance from water, fire, smoke, dust, rubbish and all other causes resulting from the construction works.
Set-out and tolerances
1.8 DAMAGE AND NUISANCE
Locate and verify survey marks and datum points required to set out the works. Record and maintain their position. Re-establish and replace disturbed or obliterated marks.
1.9 SURVEY INFORMATION
Set out the work to conform with the drawings. Establish a permanent site datum to confirm the proposed building ground floor level and its relationship to all other existing and new building levels.
1.10 SET-OUT AND DATUM
Before commencing construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the set-out is complete and that the building is accurately placed on the site. During construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate, prepared by the same licensed cadastral surveyor confirming the set-out of the foundations and grid lines. Necessary adjustments are to be determined and agreed to by the contract administrator before proceeding further.
1.11 SET-OUT BY LICENSED CADASTRAL SURVEYOR
Provide a certificate prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the building has been constructed within the allowed height in relation to boundary. Provide the certificate to the local authority. Provide a copy of the certificate to the contract administrator
1.12 CONFIRM HEIGHT IN RELATION TO BOUNDARY
Permit without charge, the use of instruments already on site for checking, setting out and levels. 1.13 USE OF SET-OUT INSTRUMENTS
Check all dimensions both on drawings and site, particularly the correlation between components and work in place. Take all dimensions on drawings to be between structural elements before linings or finishes, unless clearly stated otherwise.
1.14 CHECK DIMENSIONS
All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Unless otherwise specified in specific work sections of this specification, tolerances for structural work shall comply with the following:
Refer to work sections for tolerance requirements for finishes.
Execution
1.15 TOLERANCES
Concrete construction: To NZS 3109 Concrete construction Clause 3.9 Tolerances for reinforcement Table 5.1 Tolerance for precast components Table 5.2 Tolerance for in situ construction To NZS 3114 Concrete surface finishes
Masonry construction: To NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship Clause 2.6.5 Tolerances Table 2.2 Maximum tolerances
Structural steelwork: To NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard Section 14.4 Tolerances (after fabrication) Section 15.3 Tolerances (erection)
Timber framing: To NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings Clause 2.2 Tolerances Table 2.1 Timber framing tolerances
Before commencing any part of the work carefully examine the previous work on which it may depend. Report in writing to the contract administrator defects that may affect the quality of the proposed work and obtain instructions. Commencing work on any part means that previous work is accepted as being satisfactory for work of the required standard.
1.16 EXAMINE PREVIOUS WORK
All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Employ only experienced workers familiar with the materials and techniques specified.
1.17 WORKER QUALIFICATIONS
1.18 MINIMISE DELAYS DUE TO WEATHER
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 30
Use appropriate techniques and methods to prevent damage and minimise delays due to weather.
Materials
Materials and products to be new unless stated otherwise, of the specified standard, and complying with all cited documents.
1.19 NEW PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Ensure all parts of a construction or finish are compatible and their individual use approved by the manufacturers and suppliers of other parts of the system. Source all parts of a system from a single manufacturer or supplier.
1.20 COMPATIBILITY OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Take delivery of and store products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the product manufacturer's or supplier's stated requirements. Maintain the proper condition of any protective packaging, wrappings or supports during delivery, unloading and storage.
1.21 STORING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Handle products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines. Avoid distortion and any contact with potentially damaging surfaces or conditions.
1.22 HANDLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Ensure substrate conditions are within the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines both before and during the installation of any material, product or system. Obtain written instructions on the necessary action to rectify unsatisfactory conditions.
1.23 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's or supplier's technical literature. Ensure that all installers are familiar with the required substrate conditions and the manufacturer's or supplier's specified preparation, fixing and finishing techniques.
1.24 INSTALLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Comply with the relevant and/or cited Standard for any material or component. Obtain certificates of compliance when requested by the contract administrator.
1.25 COMPLY WITH STANDARDS
To be in perfect condition when incorporated into the work. 1.26 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
Separate incompatible materials and metals with separation layers, sleeves or gaskets of plastic film, bituminous felt or mastic or paint coatings, installed so that none are visible on exposed surfaces.
Samples and tests
1.27 INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS AND METALS
Where specified in the work sections, submit samples, prepare sample panels, and construct prototypes for review as to appearance, form and conformance with the drawings and specifications. Submit all information required to assist the review process, including technical data, manufacturer's literature, independent appraisals and producer statements. Timing for the provision and review of samples, sample panels and prototypes to be included in the contract programme. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for each review. Proceed only after instructions to proceed have been issued in writing by the contract administrator. In situ work may be incorporated in the finished work if so confirmed, otherwise allow to remove completely and replace.
1.28 SAMPLES AND PROTOTYPES
Obtain the contract administrator's confirmation of material, component and work samples which then become the quality control standard. Remove from the site any rejected samples. Retain confirmed samples with care on site for comparison throughout the contract. Remove from the site when no longer required.
Spares
1.29 CONTROL STANDARD
Collect, protect and store safely all spare materials required under the contract. Give the contract administrator an inventory of all spares.
Final presentation and cleaning
1.30 SPARES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 31
Remove all temporary markings, coverings, labels and protective wrappings unless instructed otherwise. 1.31 REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION
Replace all materials or component damaged during the works to the standard of and integral with the original.1.32 REPLACE DAMAGED MATERIALS
Ensure all services are complete and operational, with all temporary labelling removed, required labelling fixed and service instructions provided.
1.33 COMPLETE ALL SERVICES
Clear the contract works of all construction materials, waste, dirt and debris. Clean the contract works including:
� Wipe all surfaces to remove construction dust � Clean out service ducts and accessible concealed spaces � Clean out all gutters and rainwater heads � Wipe dust from both sides of glass. Take particular care when removing paint or cementitious materials
to not damage the glass. � Remove adhesive residue left by labels and other temporary protection/markings � Clean out the interior of all cabinetry � Wash down external concrete including driveways and concrete masonry. Take care when
waterblasting to not cause damage to the surface or allow water to enter the building. � Remove rubbish and building material from the area immediately adjacent to the contract works
1.34 CLEANING BY CONTRACTOR
Use a commercial cleaning firm to clean the whole of the interior of the building, including all appliances, equipment, fittings, surfaces and finishes to leave it without any blemish. Cleaning to include:
� Clean and wash down all external surfaces to remove dirt, debris and marking. � Clean all interior surfaces including cabinetwork, joinery, sanitary and hardware items. � Vacuum or polish all floor finishes. � Clean and polish all glass, both sides.
Commissioning
1.35 CLEANING BY COMMERCIAL CLEANER
Adjust, ease and lubricate all doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances, controls and all moving parts to give easy and efficient operation.
1.36 MOVING PARTS
~ 1.37 TESTS AND CERTIFICATION
Remove any temporary lock cylinders and complete final keying prior to handing over keys to the principal on completion of the works. Leave the works secure with all accesses locked. Account for all keys/cards/codes and hand to the principal along with an itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the principal as a receipt.
1.38 SECURITY AT COMPLETION
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 32
2110 DEMOLITION WORKS
This section relates to the demolition of existing buildings and structures in whole or in part, to the extent necessary to carry out the new work. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.10 New Site Plan for clarification on scope that falls under each of two phases of operation. Demolition includes part of the existing timber framed residential building and its supporting concrete slab, all of the current reception building, the garage beside the current reception building, and removal of the concrete slab following removal of the existing Versatile garage. Adequate site visits are required to assist in pricing these works. Asbestos may be present in the garage beside the existing reception building.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 1234 Documentation - Building Consent Requirements Refer to 1260 Project Management - Health and Safety clauses
1.1 RELATED WORK
Documents referred to in this section are:
Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction noise NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand NZDAA New Zealand guidelines for the management and removal of asbestos
Carry out demolition only under the supervision of a suitably experienced person and using only experienced operators and drivers. Use only experienced, certified, construction blasters for explosives demolition.
1.3 QUALIFICATION
Refer to NZS 6803, tables 2 and 3 for the allowable upper limits of construction work noise in residential, commercial and industrial areas over the various time periods. Use silenced and noise insulated plant to ensure compliance with these requirements.
1.4 NOISE
Take all precautions necessary to minimise nuisance caused by dust, dirt, rubbish and water. 1.5 NUISANCE
Comply with the Health and Safety in Employment Act in general, NZBC F5/AS1 and NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand, section 5 Demolition Safety.
1.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY
Demolition work to be carried out to building consent requirements 1.7 BUILDING CONSENT REQUIREMENTS
Inspection of the demolition work to take place at each of the stages as scheduled in the building consent. Confirm a written programme to facilitate these inspections, including notification when each stage of the work is ready for inspection. Allow 48 hours advanced notice for the inspections. Obtain and pay for any required inspections which are additional to the building consent.
1.8 INSPECTIONS
Before commencing work, carry out a thorough survey and examination of all buildings or structures to be demolished in order to ensure the extent, sequence, technique and method of demolition proposed can be safely and efficiently carried out. Take photographs of the works, adjacent buildings and sites, before commencing work. Provide a set of these photographs as a record of existing condition.
1.9 SURVEY
Before commencing demolition, arrange with all utility network operators to disconnect services and remove fittings and equipment. Pay all fees and charges for this work.
1.10 SERVICES
Material from the demolition becomes the property of the contractor except where expressly provided otherwise. Remove redundant materials from the site as work proceeds.
1.11 MATERIAL
Designated items remain the property of the owner. 1.12 SALVAGE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 33
Burning of materials is not permitted on site. 1.13 BURNING OF MATERIALS
2 PRODUCTS
Carefully dismantle, remove and store on site where directed. Protect from damage and weather until required.
2.1 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE OR RE-USE
3 EXECUTION
Comply with the requirements of NZDAA Best practice guidelines for demolition in New Zealand. Submit a written demolition plan to the requirements of section 4.7, Demolition plan (method statement).
3.1 DEMOLITION GENERALLY
Support and protect adjoining property. Survey adjoining properties and take all precautionary measures necessary to avoid damage or nuisance. Copy of the survey results to be sent to adjoining property owners.
3.2 ADJOINING PROPERTY
Protect retained parts of existing buildings, the site and site structures, trees and shrubs. Take care in the cutting away and stripping out to reduce the amount of making good.
3.3 PROTECT
Support and brace the existing structure during the cutting of new openings or the replacement of structural parts. Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structure. Do not remove supports until the new work is strong enough to support the existing structure. Ensure all work remains structurally stable and sound.
3.4 SUPPORT
Erect approved screens wherever penetration of weather, dust and dirt needs to be prevented. Adjust screens as work proceeds.
3.5 TEMPORARY SCREENS
Prevent access by unauthorised persons. Illuminate and protect all holes, unsafe buildings and other hazards. Leave site and buildings safe at the close of each day's work.
3.6 SITE SAFETY
Prevent fire or explosion and arrange to alert the appropriate authority where any danger exists. 3.7 FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE CONDITIONS
Demolish buildings and structures down to the existing finished ground level. Do not remove support to adjacent properties or buildings.
3.8 DEMOLISH
Carry out relocation, to the general requirements of the NZDAA publication: Best Practice Guidelines for Demolition in New Zealand. The building will be relocated by NCC, the slab to be removed as part of this contract.
3.9 RELOCATION OF VERSATILE GARAGE - SEPARATE CONTRACT
Where demolition work includes contact with or removal of material containing asbestos, comply with NZDAA: New Zealand guidelines for the management and removal of asbestos.
3.10 DEMOLITION, ASBESTOS
Dig out foundations, footings, basements, floor slabs, paths, drains, cesspits and manholes that are part of or service the demolished building. Do not backfill the resulting voids.
3.11 DIG OUT
Carefully dismantle and store safely all salvage items where directed; for removal, use on the site, or until completion of the works.
3.12 SALVAGE
Reinstate and make good demolition damage to adjoining properties, existing work, services, or property. 3.13 REINSTATE AND MAKE GOOD
Take away from the site all plant and equipment, temporary access works and demolished materials and elements. Leave the site completely clean and tidy.
3.14 TAKE AWAY
4 SELECTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 34
4.1 ELEMENTS FOR DEMOLITION AND DISPOSAL
Element/component Location Part of the existing residential building, all of the existing reception building, all of the garage beside the existing reception building
Refer to 1535 GA.10
Salvage the following elements and deliver to the owner. 4.2 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE AND DELIVERY TO OWNER
Element/component Location Delivery requirements Any stainless steel Both buildings Pass to NCC
Salvage the following elements. 4.3 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE AND DISPOSAL BY CONTRACTOR
Element/component Location Disposal requirements
Any asbestos to be disposed of in accordance with the New Zealand guidelines for the management of the removal of asbestos
To be determined by the demolition contractor
4.4 ELEMENTS FOR RE-USE
Element/component Location Location for re-use No elements for re-use
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 2110 DEMOLITION WORKS Page 35
3820 CARPENTRY
This section relates to the supply and erection of timber framing, as a framed structure, or as partitioning. It includes prefabricated timber and engineered wood. The new building has 140 x 45 external timber framing throughout with 90 x 45 internal timber framing. It has a Rib-Raft concrete slab, 2 steel portals, some steel framed structure and standard timber trusses in the lower roof part of the building. Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 19, 30, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22. This section includes the substrate and cavity battens required for the Craftstone real stone veneer panels. Fundermax exterior panels to provide sun shading on the north elevation above the veranda roof are also included in this section. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and details on drawing 1535 GD.21.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils and DPC Refer to 4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding Refer to 4272C Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Refer to 4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System Refer to 4311D Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors Refer to 4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 5113G Gib plasterboard linings Refer to 5151 Internal Trim Refer to 5230 Interior doors Refer to 5311F Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems Refer to 5313F Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling System Refer to 5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry Refer to 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
*A copy of NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings, must be held on site.
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC B2/AS1 Durability AS/NZS 1328.1 Glued laminated structural timber - Performance requirements and
minimum production requirements AS/NZS 1604.5 Specification for preservative treatment - Glue laminated timber products NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3622 Verification of timber properties NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber AS/NZS 4357.0 Structural laminated veneer lumber - Specification FTMA CoP Frame and Truss Manufacturers Association Code of Practice
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Carters Manufacturer/supplier contact details
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Carter Holt Harvey Woodproducts Ltd Web: www.chhproducts.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 326 759
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Fundermax GmbH Manufacturer/supplier contact details
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Maxclad Web: www.maxclad.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 03 358 8179, 021 614 373
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 36
Workers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
All timber sizes except for battens are actual minimum dried sizes. 1.6 DIMENSIONS
2 PRODUCTS
Species, grade and in service moisture content to NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1 and treatment to NZS 3640, NZBC B2/AS1. Structural grade (SG) to NZS 3604, NZS 3622 with properties to NZS 3603.
2.1 TIMBER FRAMING, TREATED
To FTMA CoP. Moisture content 16% at supply. 2.2 TIMBER TRUSSES
H3.1 Radiata pine battens, minimum 20mm thickness, width and height to match timber framing studs. Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings. To NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance. The cavity battens for the Craftstone real stone veneer panels are 45mm wide x 40mm deep H3.1 Radiata pine. Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings.To NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.
2.3 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS - TIMBER - NON-STRUCTURAL
BGC Medium Density fibre cement autoclaved sheet - 9mm minimum 2.4 SUBSTRATE FOR CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM
Max Exterior F-Quality - 8.0 to 11.9mm
Components
2.5 FUNDERMAX PANELS
Type to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the size and number for each particular types of joint as laid down in the nailing schedules of NZS 3604, sections 6-10.
2.6 NAILS
Bolts and screws of engineering and/or coach type complete with washers, to the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.
2.7 BOLTS AND SCREWS
Comply with the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10. Plates to the plate manufacturer's design for the particular locations as shown on the drawings.
2.8 NAIL PLATES
Comply with the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10. Connectors and structural brackets to the connector manufacturer's design for particular locations shown on drawings.
2.9 CONNECTORS
For interior timber, treated with copper-based timber preservatives (H3.2 or higher), use a minimum of hot-dipped galvanized steel fixings and fasteners. For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use only stainless steel (or equivalent) fixings and connectors, when the timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).
2.10 CORROSION RISKS
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft Underlays, foils and DPC 2.11 DPC
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 37
To NZS 3604 except as varied in this specification. Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).
Separate all timber framing timbers from concrete, masonry and brick by: - � a full length bituminous damp-proof membrane overlapping timber by at least 6mm; or � a 12mm minimum free draining air space
3.2 SEPARATION
Provide and fix blocks, nogs, openings and other items as required by other trades. 3.3 ATTENDANCE
Maximum allowable equilibrium moisture content (EMC) for non air-conditioned or centrally heated buildings for framing to which linings are attached.
3.4 MOISTURE CONTENT
Framing at erection: 24% maximum Framing at enclosure: 20% maximum Framing at lining: 16% maximum
Set out framing in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604 and as required to support sheet linings and claddings.
3.5 SET-OUT
Frame to required loading and bracing complete with lintels, sills and nogs, all fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 8, Walls.
3.6 FRAMING WALLS
Frame to required loading and bracing complete with valley boards, ridge boards and purlins. Design and fit roof trusses complete with anchorage. All fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 9, Posts and 10, Roof framing.
3.7 FRAMING ROOFS
Frame to required loading and bracing complete with runners and battens set out to support ceiling lining. All fabricated and fastened to NZS 3604, section 13, Ceilings. Trim for openings in ceilings and hatches to NZS 3604 section 13.3, Openings in ceilings. Provide blocking for water tanks located in the ceiling space to NZS 3604, section 13.4, Water tanks in roof space.
3.8 FRAMING CEILINGS
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.9 INSTALLING WALL UNDERLAYS
Fit and fix 20mm and 45 x 45 cavity battens over wall underlay, fully nail to timber studs to the requirements of the manufacturer or to NZS 3604. Fit and fix related flashings. Fit and fix cavity closers to base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions and over openings (windows, meters etc.).
3.10 FIT CAVITY BATTENS
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.11 DPC TO LOSP TREATED TIMBER
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 3.12 DPC TO TIMBER
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING - RADIATA PINE
Member Species Grade Treatment Exterior walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Jamb battens Radiata pine Merch H3.1
4.2 CAVITY BATTENS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 38
Cavity battens Species Grade Treatment Timber - Non Structural: Radiata pine Merchantable H3.1 Cavity closer: Type: uPVC perforated strip n/a
4.3 ROOF FRAMING - RADIATA PINE
Member Species Grade Treatment Rafters: Radiata pine SG8, SG10 in veranda roof H1.2 Trusses: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Purlins: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Skillion roof framing Radiata pine SG8 H1.2
4.4 INTERIOR FRAMING - RADIATA PINE
Member Species Grade Treatment Non structural walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2 Structural and braced walls: Radiata pine SG8 H1.2
4.5 FUNDERMAX SUN SHADING PANELS
Product Thickness Colour Colour Max Exterior F-Quality 8.0 to 11.9mm Steel blue (0712 NG) To be confirmed
4.6 NAILS
Location Type Material Finish Linea cladding fixings Jolt head, flat head Galvanised steel
4.7 BOLTS AND SCREWS
Location Type Material Finish Timber to timber connections Coach screws Galvanised steel
4.8 NAIL PLATES
Location Type Material Finish Timber to timber connection Pryda Multigrips Galvanised steel
4.9 CONNECTORS
Location Type Material Finish Fascia supports Steel angle cleats Galvanised
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 3820 CARPENTRY Page 39
4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC
This section relates to the application of Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd, DPC, DPM, underfloor foil insulation, wall underlays and roofing underlays. Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13,
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
The following definitions apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc.
Wall underlay the same meaning as defined in NZBC E2/AS1, covering kraft based and synthetic wall underlays, sometimes called, wall wraps, building wraps or building papers.
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1530.2 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -
Test for flammability of materials NZS 2295 Pliable, permeable building underlays AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4200.1 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Materials NZS 4214 Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of buildings AS/NZS 4389 Roof safety mesh AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice
Thermakraft documents relating to work in this section are: Thermakraft product manual and technical data sheets. BRANZ Appraisal 329 - Supercourse 500 Damp-Proof Course and Concealed Flashing BRANZ Appraisal 651 - Thermakraft Covertek™ 407 Fire Retardant Self Supporting Synthetic Roofing Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 695 - Watergate-Plus Fire Retardant Wall Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 803 - Bulldog™/Aluminium Window Sealing System BRANZ Appraisal 878 - Thermakraft Aluband Window Flashing Tape Code Mark Certificate 30028 - Thermakraft Covertek 407 Absorbent Breathable Roof Underlay Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Thermakraft Industries (NZ) Ltd Web: www.thermakraft.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 806 595
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 40
Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution. Thermakraft Industries Ltd warrant performance of products if design and installation complies with relevant technical literature, NZBC, and recognised industry Codes of Practice. Copy of Thermakraft Product Warranty available on request.
Requirements
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified materials, or associated products, components or accessories.1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Installers to be experienced in the installation of Thermakraft products and familiar with Thermakraft Industries technical literature and the related documents listed in this design i.e. NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice.
1.7 INSTALLATION SKILL LEVELS
Materials
DPC
2 PRODUCTS
Supercourse 500™ hi-impact polyethylene film to AS/NZS 2904 and embossed on both sides. Thickness 500 microns minimum, manufactured for use as a damp-proof course and concealed flashings around doors and windows and to BRANZ Appraisal 329. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.
DPM
2.1 EMBOSSED POLYETHYLENE
Thermathene Orange™ 300, a super heavy duty high impact film, 300 microns thick and manufactured for the building industry, to NZBC E2/AS1. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape.
UNDERFLOOR INSULATION - REFER TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION OF INSULATION PODS TO FORM THE RIB-RAFT FLOOR SLAB
Wall underlays
2.2 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE - HEAVY DUTY
Watergate-Plus™, absorbent breathable spun bonded non-woven polyolefin type building membrane, coated with a water resistant vapour permeable film. A fire retardant membrane, with Flammability Index of ≤ 5, when tested to AS 1530.2. The product has a BRANZ Appraisal 695.
Roofing underlays
2.3 SYNTHETIC BREATHER TYPE FILM COATED WALL UNDERLAY
CoverTek™ 407, a fire retardant non-woven self supporting roofing underlay, consisting of two spun-bonded polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roofing underlay for sloped roofs. CoverTek™ 407 has a flammability index of ≤ 5, tested to AS 1530.2, to NZBC C/AS1-AS7, meets the requirements for suspended fabrics, BRANZ Appraisal 651 and Code Mark Certificate 30028. Can be used in areas exposed to view in occupied spaces.
Accessories
2.4 SYNTHETIC FIRE RETARDANT SELF SUPPORTING NON-WOVEN ROOFING UNDERLAY
Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape system consists of synthetic faced reinforced bituminous window sealing tape, Thermakraft Aluband™ Corner Moulding™ piece, used in conjunction with the Thermakraft Aluband™ Hand Tool to ensure good adhesion and a tight fit into corners. See Thermakraft Data Sheet 312 for installation details and BRANZ Appraisal 878.
2.5 WINDOW AND DOOR SEALING TAPE
Thermastrap 201, 19mm wide polyethylene straps. 2.6 STUD STRAPS - POLYETHYLENE
Ausmesh 300, 2mm x 150 x 300mm galvanized or PVC coated safety mesh to AS/NZS 4389. 2.7 AUSMESH SAFETY MESH
Thermakraft 215™, bituminous breather type underlay to NZS 2295 cut to width for use under valley, apron flashing and internal gutters. Soffit liner cut to width from Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay. Refer to SELECTIONS.
2.8 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 41
Thermakraft tapes to compliment the underlay. Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes for joining foil insulation and vapour barriers. These include:
� Thermakraft White General Purpose Underlay Tape � Thermakraft Window Sealing Tapes, used to repair damaged bituminous underlays
2.9 TAPE
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Design application and installation of Thermakraft Building products to NZBC E2/AS1, BRANZ Appraisals, Thermakraft Technical Literature and Industry Codes of Practice.
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Store building underlays and accessory materials, under conditions that ensure no deterioration or damage. Store rolls in an upright position on a smooth floor and protected from sunlight, UV radiation and moisture.
3.2 STORAGE
Before starting work, check that the building construction phase will allow work of the required standard. Carry out remedial work identified before laying underlay.
Application DPC
3.3 INSPECTION
Lay Supercourse 500™ DPC under LOSP or CCA treated bottom plate of all timber framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.
3.4 DPC TO LOSP/CCA TREATED TIMBER
Lay DPC under the bottom plate of all timber / steel framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.
Application - DPM
3.5 DPC TO TIMBER / STEEL
Lay DPM under concrete floor substrate over sand blinding, in a single layer with 150mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier. Refer to SELECTIONS for type. Tape all joints and penetrations with Thermakraft White GP underlay tape.
Application - wall underlay
3.6 DPM TO CONCRETE FLOOR
Fix horizontally to outside face of framing in true alignment, with succeeding sheets overlapping 150mm to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.7, Wall underlay, and refer to Thermakraft Industries for requirement for fastenings. Fix to Thermakraft Industries Technical Data specifications. Scribe neatly around penetrations and openings to leave no gaps. Tape all penetrations. Keep clean, undamaged and without visible weather deterioration until closed in.
3.7 WALL UNDERLAY
Over underlay, install 19mm wide polyethylene straps horizontally at 300mm centres, draw taut and fix to studs with stainless steel staples.
Application - roofing underlay
3.8 INSTALL STUD STRAPS
Lay 75mm galvanized wire netting at right angles across the purlins and drawn taut before fixing. Tie edges of netting together with galvanized wire clips.
3.9 WIRE NETTING - IN VERANDA ROOF ONLY
Lay Ausmesh 300 safety mesh over exposed roof areas fixed in accordance with AS/NZS 4389 and NZMRM CoP.
3.10 SAFETY MESH
Lay horizontally across the rafter/trusses starting at the gutter line with succeeding sheets in true alignment and lapping 150mm. Scribe around and fit neatly to all penetrations. Avoid prolong exposure by installing the roof immediately.
3.11 ROOF UNDERLAY
3.12 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 42
Lay Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay cut to width by manufacturer for use as an underlay to valley, apron flashings, and internal gutters. Lap under flashings with adjoining underlays. Fix Thermakraft 215™ bituminous breather type underlay soffit liner from top plate down 150mm past ribbon plate.
Apply from the lowest point to allow laps to shed water. All edge and end laps must be overlapped by a minimum of 150mm. Ensure that the underlay is properly fixed to the surface at perimeters or around penetrations.
Completion
3.13 ROOF UNDERLAY INSTALLATION
Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.14 CLEAN UP
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.15 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.16 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.thermakraft.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Damp Proof Course
4 SELECTIONS
Damp Proof Membrane
4.1 THERMAKRAFT - SUPERCOURSE 500™ DPC
Location: Between all timber base plates and concrete slabs Type: Supercourse 500™ DPC Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband
Wall Underlays
4.2 THERMATHENE ORANGE™ 300 SUPER HEAVY DUTY HIGH IMPACT FILM
Location: Below Insulation pods in the Rib-Raft floor construction Type: Thermathene Orange™ 300 super heavy duty high impact film Jointing tape: Thermakraft "White General Purpose Underlay Tape"
Roofing Underlays
4.3 THERMAKRAFT WATERGATE-PLUS™
Location: All external walls Type: Thermakraft Watergate-Plus™ Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband
Window / Door Sealing System
4.4 COVERTEK ROOFING UNDERLAYS
Location: Below all Colorsteel Endura profiled roof sheetings Type: CoverTek 407 Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband
Stud Straps
4.5 THERMAKRAFT - ALUBAND™
Location: All window and door building wrap junctions Type: Thermakraft window sill tape 75mm Aluband™
Wire Netting
4.6 THERMASTRAP
Location: Where studs are greater than 450mm apart Type: Thermastrap 201, 19mm blue polypropylene tape
4.7 WIRE NETTING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 43
Safety Mesh
Location: Below the roofing underlay in the veranda roofing Type: 75mm galvanised wire netting
Gutter and Under Flashing
4.8 THERMAKRAFT - AUSMESH 300
Location: Below the roofing underlay in the skillion roof over the reception area
Type: Ausmesh 300 Finish: Galvanised
4.9 GUTTER AND UNDER FLASHINGS
Location: At all apron flashings Type: Apron flashing underlay 414mm wide Jointing tape: 75mm Aluband
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS & DPC Page 44
4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING
This section relates to the supply and fixing of the following fibre cement products:
� James Hardie Linea® Weatherboard cladding � James Hardie selected soffit lining
The building is clad in Linea, Craftstone and RSC LiteRock render system - refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 19, 30, 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44 and GD.20, 21 and 22. The scope also includes 600mm wide external soffits and larger soffit areas below the veranda roofs.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Capentry Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial alumiuium windows and doors Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability requirements.
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC E2/VM1 Weathertightness AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings
James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work: Linea® Weatherboard technical specification Linea® Oblique Weatherboard horizontal installation technical specification Linea® Oblique Weatherboard vertical installation technical specification James Hardie Weatherboards technical specification Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual BRANZ Appraisal 447 - Linea® Weatherboard Cavity Cladding CodeMark™ Certificate Number GM-10-30018 James Hardie Linea™ Weatherboard Direct fixed and Cavity Cladding Manufacturer/supplier contact details
BRANZ appraisal is available at www.branz.co.nz.
Warranties
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: James Hardie New Zealand Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: Contact James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
25 years: For Linea® Weatherboard product (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty)
15 years: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty)
15 years: For James Hardie HardieGroove Lining From: Date of purchase
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 45
Requirements
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work.
Requirements - Linea Weatherboard with CodeMark™ Certificate
1.6 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Installer to be experienced in the application and a; � A Licenced Building Practitioner; or, � A person with a trade certificate being a current member of a Building Trade Association.
If requested provide evidence of qualification prior to commencing work.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS - LINEA® INSTALLER
Installer to comply with all the relevant information in; � Linea® Weatherboard Technical Specification (Mar 2015); and, � BRANZ Appraisal 446 or BRANZ Appraisal 447
1.8 LINEA® WEATHERBOARD INSTALLATION INFORMATION
Installer to complete, sign and provide a James Hardie Installation Checklist incorporating the Certificate of Installation requirements of Global-Mark CodeMark Certification program. Contact James Hardie for a copy of the Installation Checklist.
Performance
1.9 LINEA® WEATHERBOARD INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone. James Hardie Technical Specifications are suitable for these conditions.
1.10 PERFORMANCE, WIND
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Radiata pine battens, minimum 45mm wide x 18mm thick, H3.1 treated, height to match timber framing studs. To NZS 3602, Table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.
2.1 EXTERIOR CAVITY BATTENS
Perforated uPVC, with upstands. 2.2 EXTERIOR CAVITY CLOSER/VERMIN-PROOFING
James Hardie Linea® Weatherboards, 16mm thick, pre-primed, manufactured from a reduced density cellulose fibre cement formulation and cured by high pressure autoclaving, manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2, tested to NZBC E2/VM1 for weathertightness and complying with the NZBC.
2.3 LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS
James Hardie 7.5mm HardieGroove Lining. Lining manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water and cured by high pressure autoclaving manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2
Components
2.4 SOFFIT LINING
Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions. Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.
Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.
2.5 FASTENER TYPE
Zone Fixings Material Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal) Grade 316 Stainless Zone B, Zone C Hot-dipped galvanized Bracing - All zones Grade 316 Stainless
30mm x 7 gauge stainless steel HardieDrive screws 2.6 SCREWS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 46
60mm x 3.15mm diameter jolt head 65mm x 2.87mm diameter D head ring shank nail 65mm x 2.87mm diameter RoundDrive ring shank nail 75mm x 3.15mm diameter jolt head 90mm x 4.0mm diameter jolt head HardieFlex™ Nail 40mm x 2.8mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 50mm x 2.8mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 60mm x 3.15mm diameter HardieFlex™ Nail 75mm x 3.15mm diameter
2.7 GALVANIZED NAILS
Extruded uPVC jointer, 2 way jointer, capping and scotia mould.
Accessories
2.8 SOFFIT JOINTERS AND CAPPING MOULDS
Silaflex MS sealant or similar. Refer to James Hardie technical specifications for application requirements. 2.9 SEALANT
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed.
3.1 STORAGE
Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Carry weatherboards in vertical position. Do not drag weatherboards across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.
3.2 HANDLING
Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by James Hardie for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.
Application - generally
3.3 SUBSTRATE
Install 18mm minimum thick cavity battens to NZBC E2/AS1: 9.0 Wall claddings, where required. Fix vertical cavity battens to wall framing studs. The battens are fixed by the cladding fixings which will penetrate the wall framing studs under the wall underlay. Seal the top of the cavity and install cavity closer/vermin-proofing at base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions, over openings (windows, meters etc). Do not use horizontal cavity battens. Use cavity spacers where fixing is required between cavity battens.
3.4 INSTALL CAVITY BATTENS
Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:
� Wall underlay appropriately incorporated with penetration and junction flashings. � Materials lapped in a way that water tracks down to the exterior face of the wall underlay. � Wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames
and other penetrations � Claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � Installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements).
3.5 PENETRATIONS AND FLASHINGS
Cut weatherboards to required lengths and fit joints off-stud using tongue and groove ends. Fit internal corners and fix weatherboards as per Linea® Weatherboard technical specifications. Fit and fix external corners and joint soakers as required.
3.6 INSTALL LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS
Install flashings at all wall openings, penetrations, junctions, connections, window sills, heads and jambs to NZBC E2/AS1.
3.7 INSTALL FLASHINGS
Cut sheets dry and ensure all edges and joints are fully supported. Nail and insert uPVC fasteners to James Hardie requirements. Fit complete with jointers and capping moulds. Refer to Eaves and Soffit Linings installation manual.
3.8 INSTALL SOFFIT SHEETS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 47
Completion
Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.9 REPLACE
Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
Linea® Weatherboards
4.1 CAVITY BATTENS
Timber species: Radiata pine Treatment: H3.1
4.2 JAMES HARDIE LINEA® WEATHERBOARDS
Location: As shown on drawing 1535 GA.30 Elevations and 1535 GD.20, 21, 22 Brand/type: James Hardie Linea® Weatherboard Thickness: 16mm Width: 150mm Construction: Cavity Nail pattern: Concealed nailing Nail finish: Galvanised steel Nails: 60 x 3.15 HardieFlex nails
4.3 JAMES HARDIE LINEA® WEATHERBOARD CORNERS
Type: Mitred Soaker type: Aluminium
Finishing
4.4 JAMES HARDIE SOFFIT SHEETS
Brand/type: James Hardie HardieGroove Thickness: 7.5mm Jointer type: Chamfer formed on site for butt jointing along short edges, half
grooves along long edges under the veranda for butt jointing Nails: 40 x 2.8 HardieFlex Nails
Refer to painting section(s) for details. 4.5 PAINTING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4231HW JAMES HARDIE WEATHERBOARD CLADDING Page 48
4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM
This section relates to the supply and installation of Craftstone NZ Ltd Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System as a non-structural, decorative, natural stone veneer adhered to various substrates. These include:
� fibre cement board on a drained cavity over timber framing Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 for positions of the 4 areas of stone veneer - these run from base overhangs up to underside of the veranda roofs and from base overhangs up to underside of the main roofs. The design is such that the panels stop above, to the side and below the area where the veranda roof comes up to the Craftstone wall on the west elevation
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry for substrate and cavity batten system Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4281RL RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System Refer to 4710P Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheets NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NASH Standard Residential and low-rise steel framing Part 1: Design Criteria NASH Handbook Best practice for Design and construction of Residential and low-rise Steel
Framing NASH N-10 Thermal Break and Cavity Construction
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual BRANZ Appraisal 793 - Craftstone Real Stone Veneer Systems Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Craftstone NZ Ltd Web: www.craftstone.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 447 3918
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For material components of Craftstone system.
� Provide this warranty on Craftstone NZ Ltd standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Provide an installer warranty: 5 years: For installation of the Craftstone system.
� Provide this warranty on the Craftstone Approved Installer's standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 49
Installers to be approved installers and registered members of Craftstone NZ Ltd installer's network. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified systems, components and associated products listed in this section.
Compliance information
1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Provide the following compliance documentation: - � Licensed applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / importer / distributor � Manufacturer's, importers or distributors warranty � Licensed applicator's warranty � Producer Statement - Construction from the installer
Performance - Wind (design by contractor)
1.8 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE
Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.4. Refer to general section 1220 PROJECT for details.
1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Feature SchistClad Panels - Real Stone Veneer, natural stone pieces pre-cut into rectangles and epoxy glued together to form modular panels, measuring approximately 600mm long x 150mm high x 20mm to 30mm nominal thickness, 60 kg/m² approximate weight. Options available include 400mm x 150mm natural ends. Refer to SELECTIONS for size and colour options.
2.1 FEATURE SCHIST - REAL STONE PANELS
To AS/NZS 2908.2. BGC Stonesheet medium density, fibre cement autoclaved sheet produced on a "flow on" process, with specified edge details and surface finishes. Sheets available 9mm x 1200mm wide x 2400mm/ 2700mm/ 3000mm long. Refer to the carpentry section for specific requirements.
2.2 FIBRE CEMENT SUBSTRATE - ON TIMBER OR STEEL FRAMING
Cavity batten system comprised of: � Radiata pine battens, 40mm thickness x 40mm depth, width and height to match framing studs.
Treatment to NZBC B2/AS1 and NZS 3602, table 1. Refer to appropriate cavity batten system section for specific requirements.
Components
2.3 CAVITY BATTEN
Craftseal Water-Proofer, a penetrating silane/siloxane sealer and waterproofer, formulated specifically to prevent moisture absorption into masonry and fibre cement substrates. Applied by brush or spray-pack, supplied as a liquid concentrate diluted with water ready to use.
2.4 SEALER/WATERPROOFER
Adhesive Spray Primer, a specialised primer applied to fibre cement sheet joints and external corners, prior to application of Craftape, a flexible adhesive-compatible waterproofing tape. Tape supplied in two sizes:
� 70mm wide x 30m long for sheet joints � 150mm wide x 30m long for external corners.
2.5 PRIMER AND JOINT WATERPROOFING TAPE
Craftbond Adhesive Mortar, a factory mixed, crack resistant, adhesive mortar with a high flexural-strength ratio for use as an adhesive coating for all concrete, masonry, fibre cement and AAC concrete substrates. Supplied in bags and mixed with water for use. Cures to a light grey colour and may require tinting with dispersed oxide for some applications.
2.6 ADHESIVE MORTAR
Craftanchor, a proprietary 304 stainless steel anchor, 70mm long x 20mm wide, fixed with 65mm x 12 gauge hex head self-drilling screws at 300mm centres vertically to studs spaced at 400mm centres maximum.
2.7 STONE VENEER ANCHOR
Craftsill and Craftjamb flashings for flush mounted door and window joinery. 2.8 SILL AND JAMB FLASHINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 50
Craftint mortar colours, a dispersed liquid oxide, formulated to be diluted with clean water to achieve the selected colour, available in a range of colours, from black to deep grey. Refer to SELECTIONS for colour options.
2.9 TINTING MORTAR
Craftstone NZ Ltd range of uv resistant PVC flashings, trims and sealant support accessories. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.
Accessories
2.10 PVC FLASHING AND FINISHING TRIMS
Overlap each second course 2.11 ANGLE CHANGES
Craftstone preformed sills. Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.12 SILLS
Craftstone preformed wall caps. Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.13 WALL CAPS
Craftstone preformed column caps. Refer to SELECTIONS. 2.14 COLUMN CAPS
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Take delivery of materials and goods, store on site and protect from damage. Provide dry under cover storage for Craftstone Real Stone Veneer materials, components and accessories. Store liquids in frost free conditions. Handle all materials in accordance with Craftstone NZ Ltd instructions.
3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of the work. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Timber framing to comply with NZS 3604. Check studs are at a maximum 400mm centres and nogs are fitted flush between studs at a maximum 800mm centres.
3.3 TIMBER FRAMING
Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the Craftstone Real Stone Veneer. Required preparatory work includes the following:
� stone veneer wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations by main contractor
� stone veneer neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements).
3.4 PENETRATIONS
Ensure that cavity batten system is installed to the cavity batten manufacturer's installation requirements, and in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.
3.5 CAVITY BATTENS
Ensure that the substrate is suitable for the veneer application, installed to the fibre cement manufacturer's installation requirements, as required by NZBC B1/AS1, and in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.
3.6 SUBSTRATE - FIBRE CEMENT, ON TIMBER OR STEEL FRAMING
Craftanchor and fixings for fibre cement applications to be supplied by Craftstone NZ Ltd and installed by main contractor in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual.
Installation/application
3.7 ANCHORS - INSTALLED BY MAIN CONTRACTOR
Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.
Installation - general
3.8 STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 51
Install Craftstone Real Stone Veneer in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual, and to NZBC E2/AS1.
Installation/application - with fibre cement substrate
3.9 INSTALLATION GENERAL
Clean board surface with a stiff brush or broom to remove dust or any other contaminants which may impede adhesion of mortar.
3.10 PREPARE SUBSTRATE
Apply liberal coating on Craftseal with brush or spray-pack. Coat all exposed board including joint recesses and the bottom sheet edge.
3.11 APPLY SEALER
Apply Spray Adhesive to all areas where taped joints are to be installed, then apply 70mm band to sheet joints, and 150mm band to external corners. Press edges firmly into place as the adhesive sets.
3.12 APPLY SPRAY ADHESIVE AND CRAFTAPE
Set construction joints, extrusions and mechanical sill and jamb flashings into place with fibreglass reinforced mesh embedded in a layer of Craftbond. Note construction joints and extrusions supplied and installed by main contractor. Mechanical sill and jamb flashings supplied and installed by Craftstone approved installers.
3.13 SET CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND WINDOW FLASHINGS
Set up temporary timber supports for the bottom course. 3.14 SET UP TEMPORARY TIMBER SUPPORTS
Mark out framing lines (studs) and fix stainless steel Craftanchors to studs with 65mm x 12 gauge hex head self-drilling screws at 300mm centres. Position anchors horizontally wherever possible.
3.15 INSTALL ANCHORS - BY MAIN CONTRACTOR
Mix Craftbond adhesive mortar at a ratio of 4 litres of clean water to each 20kg, using a mixing drill and whisk, and allow to set for 4-5minutes before lightly remixing. Do not make up more than can be used in 2 hours. Press mortar under the anchor wings, then apply an 8-10mm continuous layer of mortar to board surface to sufficiently cover anchor, while embedding stone modules. Limit the area to that which can be covered with stone within a 15-20 minute period. Ensure a mortar tail of sufficient thickness is remaining after stone installation so the next bedding application can be blended for continuity. " Buttering" can be used to assist with embedment.
3.16 APPLY ADHESIVE MORTAR
Press stone firmly into mortar with a wriggling motion for initial suction bonding. Take extra care to ensure mortar does not contaminate surface of the stone. Install bottom course and corner stones first and then fill the spaces in between with appropriate random or cut pieces. Mark the wall with chalk line at suitable intervals to assist with straight and level placement of the stones. Where stone crosses control or construction joints, stonework must be finger jointed at the intersection of the joint by applying mortar to the longest side of the stone only, allowing the remainder to float across the joint. Schistclad individual stone installations would require specific selection of stones of suitable length to achieve this. As a general rule Craftstone recommends a ratio of 75% mortared, to 25% floating.
3.17 INSTALL STONE
Sort corner pieces and use four similar sized corners and flats on each course. Cut back each second course of corner stones to achieve a natural look and to achieve the fit to size.
Installation - accessories
3.18 COLUMNS
Ensure electrical cables do not come into contact with cladding substrate. Support cable immediately behind the board by passing through a hole drilled in framing member. Where required fit a meter box flashing option in accordance with Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual. Allow a minimum 5mm drainage and ventilation gap between the top of the head flashing and bottom edge of the stone.
3.19 JOINERY AND METER BOXES
Ensure allowance is made for sills. Fit wedge shaped sills with a minimum 15 degree angle to NZBC E2/AS1.Figure 73c. Adhere smaller 90mm sills directly to the wall.
3.20 SILLS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 52
Control joints
Refer to Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Technical Manual for formation of control joints. Where individual stones cross a control joint, apply mortar to the longest side only and avoid mortar crossing the joint. Finger joint the stone over the control joint. Apply this technique in layers over the height of the wall to conceal the joint. Note: Control and expansion joints to be in accordance with substrate manufacturer's requirements and be installed by the substrate installer.
Inter-storey junctions
3.21 CONTROL JOINTS
Construct in accordance with substrate manufacturer's requirements, and to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.9.4.
Cleaning and protection
3.22 INTER-STOREY JUNCTIONS
Keep stone dry at all times prior to laying. Protect the top row of uncompleted walls. Protect freshly laid veneer during interruption through rain and at completion of each day's work.
3.23 WET WEATHER
Keep work face clean during erection and until completion of the contract works. Ensure all excess mortar adhesive is cleared off the face of the veneer regularly using a sponge or brush. Turn back scaffold boards at night and during heavy rain. Do not rub face work to remove stains.
Completion
3.24 KEEP WORK FACE CLEAN
Following a minimum of overnight curing wash the completed stonework thoroughly, allow it to dry and then coat with Craftseal.
3.25 SEAL SCHIST STONES AND PANELS
Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal of all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site. Use fresh water and a light brush to clean the stone. Mortar splashes or overflows must be cleaned off the stone face on the same day. Do not water blast or use acids or bleaches.
3.26 ROUTINE CLEANING
Repair damaged or marked elements. Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.
3.27 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK
For further details on selections go to www.craftstone.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following.
Materials
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 FEATURE SCHIST STONE PANELS
Location: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and GD.22 Manufacturer Craftstone NZ Ltd Brand/type: Feature SchistClad Panels - Real Stone Veneer Size: 600mm x 150mm high approximately Thickness: 20mm - 30mm nominal Weight: 60kg/m² approximately Angle change: Overlap each second course Installation: Dry stacked Colour: Basalt grey possibly - contractor to supply samples
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4272C CRAFTSTONE REAL STONE VENEER SYSTEM Page 53
4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM
This section relates to Resene Construction Systems LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System applied over approved fibre cement backing sheet substrate fixed over a drained cavity to timber or steel framing. The scope includes areas below aluminium joinery cills, beside aluminium joinery jambs, at junctions to Craftstone panel cladding and above the low level window heads. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 and GD.21 and 22
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4272C Craftstone Real Stone Veneer System Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations are used throughout this work section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
MPNZA Master Painters NZ Association. PPCS Proprietary Plaster Cladding Standard LRV Light Reflectance Value
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZS 3603 Timber structures standard NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: � Resene Construction Systems Technical Manual � Resene Construction Systems Trade Spec™ � Resene Construction Systems Project Guide � Resene Total Colour System � BRANZ Appraisal 477 - LiteRock Cavity Plus Solid Render System
Materials and execution to Resene Construction Systems specification except where varied by this specification and supported by architectural detailing. Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Contact details for Resene literature is 0800 RESENE (0800 737 363) or web site www.resene.co.nz.
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Resene Construction Systems Web: www.reseneconstruction.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 50 70 40
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For materials by Resene Construction Systems
� Provide this warranty on the Resene Construction Systems standard form.
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 54
� Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 5 years: For execution/workmanship - by Registered Plasterer
� Provide this warranty on the Resene Construction Systems standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
Use only PPCS (Proprietary Plaster Cladding Standard) registered applicators licensed to apply the Resene Construction Systems exterior render systems.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Resene Construction Systems wall cladding system. 1.8 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Submit one 300mm x 300mm sample of the selected texture finish and colour for approval. Obtain signature of acceptance on sample and return to the Registered Plasterer.
1.9 FINISH SAMPLE
Provide Resene Construction Systems Maintenance Guide on or before practical completion of the contract for issuing to the building owner. Resene Construction Systems Maintenance Guide to be provided on request.
1.10 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act and WorkSafe NZ: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry. If the elimination or isolation of potential hazards is not possible then minimise hazards in this work on site by using the proper equipment and techniques as required in the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook. Supply protective clothing and equipment. Inform employees and others on site of the hazards and put into place procedures for dealing with emergencies. Obtain from Resene Construction Systems the material safety data sheets for each product. Keep sheets on site and comply with the required safety procedures.
1.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY
Provide the producer statement compiled by the licensed applicator in the form as required by the Building Consent Authority.
Compliance information
1.12 PRODUCER STATEMENT
The work covered by this part of the specification has been designed and constructed to achieve a durability of 15 years. Refer to the following; BRANZ Appraisal 477 - LiteRock Cavity Plus Solid Render System
Performance
1.13 DURABILITY
Accept responsibility for the structural and weather-tight performance of the cladding installation. 1.14 PERFORMANCE
Allow to inspect the whole of the work at each stage. Determine a programme for inspections including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection prior to the work commencing. Permit representatives of Resene Construction Systems to inspect the work in progress and to take samples of their products from site if requested refer Resene Construction Systems Project Guide.
1.15 INSPECTIONS
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Waterborne co-polymer resin. 2.1 RESENE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS ACRYLBOND (PLASTER MODIFIER)
2.2 ROCKCOTE PM100 QUICK RENDER
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 55
Polymer modified cement-based dry plaster mix.
Light weight polymer-modified Portland cement based dry plaster mix with recycled polystyrene beading. 2.3 ROCKCOTE LITEROCK SOLID RENDER
Water-based acrylic polymer based high build coating. 2.4 ROCKCOTE POLYMER RENDER
Waterborne mineral filled acrylic polymer-based high build coating with fungicide colour tinted. 2.5 ACRYLIC TEXTURE
Acrylic waterproofing membrane, colour selection from Resene Total Colour System.
Components
2.6 RESENE X-200
Resene Construction Systems alkali-resistant fibreglass woven mesh. Low impact areas, weave 5 x 7mm x 160 g/m².
2.7 REINFORCING MESH
Corner flashing with either 120 x 80mm or 60 x 90mm mesh attached to the flashing.
Accessories
2.8 CORNER MESHES
Perforated uPVC cavity closer/vermin proofed ventilated starter strip bottom channel for base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions, over openings (windows, meters, etc). Length and width to suit cavity. Installation to be main contractor responsibility.
2.9 EXTERIOR CAVITY BASE VENTED STARTER STRIP
Resene Construction Systems proprietary profiles made from rigid uPVC. LiteRock jamb and sill flashings, Resene Construction Systems slim angle, LiteRock starter track, horizontal and vertical control joints, head flashing stop ends.
2.10 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
BRANZ appraised modified silicon (MS) sealant. 2.11 SEALANT
Rockcote MultiStop bedding compound. 2.12 ADHESION PRIMER (UPVC)
Liquid non solvent polymer based construction adhesive to the Resene Construction Systems requirements. 2.13 ADHESIVE
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Keep plaster products dry in transit. Take delivery of plaster products dry and undamaged. Reject all damaged materials.
3.1 DELIVERY
Deliver all materials in original unopened packaging with labels intact. Provide dry storage on site, stack carefully, clear of direct contact with concrete surfaces and protected from mechanical damage. Do not store PVC corner beads in direct sunlight.
3.2 STORAGE
Carry out plastering to Resene Construction Systems specification under conditions which will not adversely affect the finished work.
3.3 PLASTERING CONDITIONS
Before application of plaster, apply masking film and tape to all joinery, pipes, roofs and all areas likely to be marked by the plaster. Use drop cloths and ground covers to keep the working areas clean. Clean off droppings onto finished work immediately.
3.4 PROTECT
3.5 SUBSTRATE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 56
Do not begin the application until required openings and apertures have been cut, pipes, fixtures, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed and flashings and other preparation are complete. Do not commence plastering until substrate is of the required standard. All defects in substrate must be rectified by the main contractor prior to application of plaster coatings commencing.
Comply to the Resene Construction Systems penetration flashing guidelines. Carry out to the required standard of execution to ensure water does not penetrate.
3.6 FLASHING AND DETAILING
To the standard required by the Resene Construction Systems, plumb, level and in true alignment to either timber or steel framing. Timber framing must be to NZS 3604 or to a specific design to NZS 3603. Steel framing must be 0.55mm thick minimum to a specific design to AS/NZS 4600.
3.7 ALIGNMENT OF FRAMING
Before commencing work confirm the layout of expansion joints and other visual detailing of the finished work.
Application
3.8 CONFIRM LAYOUT
Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:
� wall underlay to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations
� claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements). � where electrical cables pass through cladding, ensure that there is no direct contact with the LiteRock
Solid Plaster Facade System, conduit required to be installed by electrician.
3.9 PENETRATIONS
Fix in place required uPVC trims, profiles flashings and control joints. Service penetrations such as piping and light fittings to be sealed by specific trade.
3.10 PENETRATION FLASHINGS
Provide control joints at locations as specified by the designer and to Resene Construction Systems requirements. Vertical control joints to be provided at 5.4 metres maximum in the plaster to coincide with movement joints in the background and/or junctions between dissimilar backgrounds in the same plane and/or where shown on the drawings and to Resene Construction Systems requirements. Horizontal control joints to be provided at inter-storey junctions. Reinforcing mesh is not continuous across control joints. Exposed control joints to be reflected through final coatings from substrate. Inter-storey drainage joints must be provided for walls over two storeys in height in accordance with the requirements of NZBC E2/AS1 9.1.9.4(b). Confirm locations in writing to the owner before work commences.
3.11 MOVEMENT CONTROL JOINTS
To NZBC E2/AS1 4.0, Flashings. Check and ensure head flashings have been installed. Fit flashings to jambs and sill on recessed joinery using Resene Construction Systems proprietary flashings. Reinforce external corners and bottom edges of polystyrene sheets with uPVC angles and channel extrusions to Resene Construction Systems technical and installation manual.
3.12 FIT FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
Apply 7mm EPS screeds to all fibre cement sheet joints (excluding sheet joints that are control joints) with panel adhesive.
Resene Construction Systems - LiteRock Solid Plaster Facade System
3.13 EPS SCREEDS
Apply key coat plaster with a notched trowel 4-6mm thickness maximum based on a mixture of 100% Acrylbond diluted with water and Rockcote PM100 Quick Render. Leave 8 hours or longer depending on drying conditions before application of LiteRock Solid Render.
3.14 SCRATCH COAT
Apply LiteRock Solid Render evenly at 8-10mm thickness minimum. Straightedge the plaster and fill in any deviations in the plaster. Embed fibreglass mesh into the wet plaster. Overlap each successive length by 100mm minimum. Ensure that the mesh is carried over all screeds and not cut between. The mesh is to terminate each side of control joints. Mesh must not be exposed but retained as close to the surface as possible. Apply sticky mesh around all external corners and into all window reveals. Apply diagonal reinforcement strips at all corners of windows, doors and other exterior openings.
3.15 MESH COAT
3.16 LEVELLING COAT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 57
Apply by trowel or pump second coat of Rockcote PM 100 Quick Render 1-2mm thickness. Trowel flat and leave to touch dry before floating off with a large plastic float and water, to remove any imperfections and leave a level surface.
Application - acrylic selection
Apply Rockcote Polymer Render coat to Resene Construction Systems requirements. 3.17 POLYMER RENDER APPLICATION
Apply Texture coat 1mm thickness minimum to achieve the specified finish and colour (optional) to Resene Construction Systems requirements.
3.18 ACRYLIC TEXTURED FINISH COAT
Apply two coats of Resene X-200 reinforced waterproof membrane to achieve a protective acrylic based finish. 3.19 PROTECTIVE FINISH COAT
Refer to SELECTIONS for system texture and colour.
Completion
3.20 FINISHING
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site relating to the plaster system application. Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. Leave the whole of this work to the required standard.
3.21 CLEANING
A final inspection by Resene Construction Systems authorised applicator and project assessor of the entire finished cladding to take place immediately after completion of the wall cladding work and any defects or subsequent damage made good immediately.
3.22 FINAL INSPECTION
For further details on selections go to www.reseneconstruction.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Materials
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 RESENE CONSTRUCTION SYSTEMS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER SYSTEM - ACRYLIC FINISH
Location Below aluminium joinery cills, above low level aluminium joinery heads, beside aluminium joinery jambs, at junctions with Craftstone stone panel cladding
Substrate 6mm Fibre cement backing board Scratch coat: Rockcote PM100 Quick Render / 100% Acrylbond Basecoat 1st layer: Rockcote LiteRock Solid Render; plus Fibreglass mesh Second layer: Rockcote PM100 Quick Render Sealer coat: Rockcote Polymer Render Texture coat: Acrylic Texture Texture finish: Resene Sandflex Standard Texture colour: Colour to LRV of 40% minimum Paint coat: Resene X-200 Paint colour: To be advised - light colour
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4281RL RCS LITEROCK SOLID PLASTER FACADE SYSTEM Page 58
4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING
This section relates to the supply and fixing of Dimond profiled roofing and includes:
� Metal roofing � accessories
The scope includes all roofing areas shown on drawing 1535 GA.20 New Roof Plan and all spoutings from Calder Stewart. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.19 New roof framing plan
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to 4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation
1.1 RELATED WORK
The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
BMT Base metal thickness NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc MS Modified silicone
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC E2/AS1 External Moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc
and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings ISO 9223 Corrosion of metals and alloys - Corrosivity of atmosphere - Classification
determination and estimation NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Web only based: Dimond Roofing and Cladding Systems Manual Available from: Dimond web site
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.dimond.co.nz Telephone 0800 346 663 (0800 DIMOND)
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:.
� Provide this warranty on Dimond standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
15 years: for failure of coating adhesion 15 years: for weatherproofing by material penetration
Provide an installer/applicator warranty:
1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
5 years from the date of completion of the roof
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 59
� Provide this warranty on Roofing installers standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Include a copy of the Dimond maintenance requirements with the warranty. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR for additional requirements. Provide all relevant Dimond maintenance information on completion of the roofing work, as required by the GENERAL sections.
Requirements
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Roofers to be Dimond Recommended Installer, or experienced, competent roofers familiar with Dimond products. And for Restricted Building Work, shall also be an LBP or supervised by an LBP. Carry out work with experienced, competent installers familiar with the products being used and with appropriate qualifications such as the National Certificate in Metal Roofing and Cladding
Performance - Wind
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
Building wind zone: Medium/ 0.85 kPa ULS(refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4) Refer to Dimond for "Wind Load Span Capacity charts".
1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
Design and use the fixings/fixing pattern appropriate for the wind design parameters. Refer to Dimond Technical Information for load span tables and fixing charts for the selected profile. Allow for specific loadings at corners and the periphery of the roof, where localised pressure factors apply. Fixing pattern to also take into account fixing method and purlin spacings.
Performance - General
1.10 FIXINGS, WIND
Co-ordinate to ensure substrate and preparatory work is complete and other work programmed in the order required for access and completion of the roof. Ensure that all necessary members are positioned so that flashings can be fastened at both edges through the roof profile or cladding to the primary structure.
1.11 CO-ORDINATE
Select installation method of the roof materials and accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed roofing system including penetrations through the roof and junctions with walls and parapets.
1.12 PERFORMANCE
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Formability steel sheet, G550 for roll forming or G300 for flashings, coated to AS 1397.
Fixings
2.1 PRE-FINISHED HOT-DIPPED ALUMINIUM/ZINC COATED STEEL
Fixings and fasteners are to be compatible with all materials, the environment and meeting the requirements of the NZ Building Code. Installation is to be in accordance with E2/AS1 and/or the NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice and Dmond requirements. For fixing patterns refer to Dimond Fixing Charts for the selected profile.
2.2 FASTENERS GENERALLY
To AS 3566. Screws appropriate to the roofing material and the supporting structure, as required by Dimond and with a minimum Class 4 or 5 durability and not less than the material being fixed. Screw into timber to penetrate by minimum 30mm. Screw fasteners to be head stamped identifying the manufacturer and class. Use Alutite or stainless steel with aluminium based sheets. Refer to SELECTIONS.
Components
2.3 FIXING SCREWS
To NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. 2.4 FLASHINGS GENERALLY
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 60
Formable grade 0.55 BMT for galvanized, aluminium/zinc, aluminium/zinc/magnesium - coated and pre-painted steel, and 0.90 for aluminium to the same standards as the profiled sheets, notched where across profile or provided with a soft edge.
Supplied by the roofing manufacturer to match or to suit the roofing in the same material as the roof. 2.5 FLASHINGS TO VERGE, RIDGE AND HIP
Generally to E2/AS1, 8.4.17 Roof penetrations(note; E2/AS1, Figure.54 Soaker flashing for pipe penetration, has an error, use as guide only) EPDM proprietary pipe flashing laid on 45° bias to roofing, with over-flashing (soaker flashing) if required. A boot flashing should be positioned so that it dams a roofing pan no more than 50%, if this cannot be avoided use an over-flashing back to the ridge and fix the boot flashing to that.
Accessories
2.6 BOOT FLASHINGS
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 2.7 WIRE NETTING AND SAFETY MESH
Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC 2.8 UNDERLAY AND REFLECTIVE FOIL
Neutral curing MS sealant or polymer sealant as required by the roofing manufacturer and used as directed. 2.9 SEALANT
Non-bituminous compressible, profiled foam strips to fit the sheet profile. 2.10 CLOSURE STRIPS
Closed cell self adhesive nitrile tape. 2.11 LAP SEALING TAPE
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Inspect the roof framing and supporting structure to ensure that it is complete and fully braced ready for roofing and free from any misalignments or protrusions that could damage the roofing.
3.1 INSPECTION
When continuous metal cladding etc. Runs along a long continuous timber member and is directly fixed to it, the timbers equilibrium moisture content (EMC) to be 18% or less. For flashings in this situation (sometimes called transverse flashings) the framing EMC to be maximum 16%, and preferably as low as 12%. Transverse flashings can be temporarily tacked in place and final fixing done when moisture content is acceptable.
3.2 FRAMING TIMBER MOISTURE
Upon delivery, visually inspect all sheets for any damage and accept packs of roofing undamaged on delivery. Reject all damaged material. Store on a level firm base with packs well ventilated and completely protected from weather and damage. Do not allow moisture to build up between sheets. If sheet packs become wet, fillet or cross stack to allow air movement between sheets.
3.3 STORAGE
Avoid distortion and contact with damaging substances, including cement. Do not drag sheets across each other and other materials. Protect edges and surface finishes from damage. Use soft, flat sole shoes when fixing and for all other work on the roof. Walk along the purlin line whenever possible.
3.4 HANDLING
Isolate dissimilar materials in close proximity as necessary by painting the surfaces or fitting separator strips of compatible or inert materials. Place isolators between metals and treated timber, cement based materials, and mixing aluminium sheet and steel mesh. Do not use unpainted lead sheet or copper in contact with or allow water run-off onto galvanized or aluminium/zinc coated steel.
Application
3.5 SEPARATION
Refer to Thermal Insulation section. 3.6 FIX INSULATION
3.7 SET-OUT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 61
Carefully set out with consideration of the position of side laps to take account of the prevailing wind and line of sight. Ensure all sheets are square and oversailing the gutter true to line. Check during fixing to eliminate creep or spread and string lines along purlin centres to keep fastenings in line.
End laps should be avoided, except where specifically detailed. 3.8 END LAPS
For sheet lengths more than 18 metres, make provision for thermal expansion where required 3.9 THERMAL MOVEMENT
Install and fix in accordance with the Dimond required fixing patterns and details for each area of the building roofing. Use only screws as required by the roofing manufacturer. Paint colour matched fixings and accessories before installation.
3.10 FIXING GENERALLY
Use chalk line, Chinagraph pencils or coloured pencil for marking roof sheets prior to cutting. Do not use lead pencil for marking Zincalume®, ZAM®, Colorsteel® and Colorcote®. Cut by shear only, using nibblers or hand snips. Remove all cutting and drilling debris from the roof.
3.11 MARKING AND CUTTING
Fix sheets in place using the fastening system required by Dimond for specified profiles, making due allowance for dynamic local wind pressures on the building and thermal movement in the sheet.
3.12 FIX SHEETS
Form stop-ends at the upper end of sheets. Form downturns at the gutter line where the roof pitch is less than 8 degrees. Form using the required tools.
3.13 STOP ENDS AND DOWNTURNS
Flash roof to parapets, walls and penetrations to detail. Flashings to be installed on timber framing with moisture content of less than 18%. Where no detail is provided flash to NZMRM CoP NZ metal roof and wall cladding Code of Practice recommendations and Dimond requirements. Cut accurately and fix using sealant and rivets to detail and to Dimond requirements to form a weatherproof cover. For highly visible flashings, plan joints/junction to take account of the aesthetic requirements.
3.14 FLASHINGS
Separate metal sheeting from CCA treated timber with an inert isolation material such as flashing tape, underlayment mat or similar. Contact Dimond for other options.
3.15 SEPARATION
Select and use sealants only as recommended by Dimond. Remove any swarf and clean down, apply sealant in two narrow beads transversely across flashing intersections, close to the two edges. Avoid exposing sealant on outside surfaces.
3.16 USE OF SEALANTS
Flash all penetrations through the roof. Fit pipe flashings with a proprietary collar flashing, with other penetrations flashed as detailed and to provide a weathertight installation. Ensure that flashings are set to avoid any ponding of water.
Completion
3.17 FLASHING PENETRATIONS
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.18 REPLACE
Leave this work complete with all necessary flashings, undercloaks, valleys, ridges and hips all properly installed as the work proceeds so the finished roof is completely weathertight.
3.19 LEAVE
Remove trade rubbish and unused materials from the roof and surrounds daily during the work. Sweep down at the end of each day, and clean out spouting, gutters and rainwater pipes on completion of the roof. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.
3.20 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.dimond.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Coating system
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 COATING SYSTEM - EXPOSURE ZONE B-C (CAT 1-3)
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 62
Project Exposure Zone B-C to NZS 3604, C 1-3 to ISO 9223.
Roofing
Profile/location: Corrugate profile / High level roofs Base material: 0.55mm BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Coating system: Colorsteel Endura Paint colour: To be advised
4.2 DIMOND CORRUGATE ROOFING
BMT/material 0.55 BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Purlin material: 240 X 45 H1.2 rafters in part of high level roof, 70 x 45 H1.2 purlins
to trussed area Fixing: Class 4, 12-11x50 type 17 Woodteks with corrugated load
spreading profile metal washers and 30mm EPDM Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond Corrugated literature for details
Accessories
4.3 DIMOND VEEDEK ROOFING
BMT/material 0.55mm BMT Alum/Zinc coated steel Purlin material: 70 x 45 H1.2 timber at 1200 centres on rafters at 900 crs Fixing: Class 4, 14-10x75 Type 17 Woodteks with neos with Veedek load
spreading profile metal washers and 36mm EPDM Fixing pattern: Refer to Dimond Veedek literature for details
4.4 FLASHINGS - GENERALLY
Profile: As detailed BMT/material: 0.55mm BMT / Alum/Zinc coated steel Coating system: To match roofing Paint colour: To match roofing
4.5 CLOSURE STRIPS
Brand: Non bituminous profiled compressed foam strips
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4311D DIMOND PROFILED METAL ROOFING Page 63
4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS
This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation by either an Altherm, First or Vantage manufacturer of
� APL Architectural Series aluminium windows and doors � 40mm commercial window systems � Hardware and furniture � Flashings and sealants
The scope includes all windows as shown on drawings 1535 GA.12, GA.30, GA.40 to 44 and GA.75. Magnum entrance doors are included as single leaf double action pivot doors. The scope also includes provision of aluminium section sub frame, top support members and bottom stabilising members for sun shading panels on the north elevation.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4161T Thermakraft underlays, foils and DPC Refer to RCS LiteRock Solid Plaster facade System Refer to 4231HW James Hardie Weatherboard Cladding Refer to 4611ME Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing
1.1 RELATED WORK
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS
SLS Serviceability limit state ULS Ultimate limit state WANZ Windows Association of New Zealand PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 64
US Federal Specification
NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/VM1 Energy efficiency NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 1580.108.1 Methods of test for paints and related materials - Determination of dry film
thickness on metallic substrates - Non destructive methods AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate AS/NZS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow
shapes AAMA 2604.05 Performance requirements and test procedures for high performance
organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints, Part C5: Determination of film thickness NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles WANZ Installation Guide The WANZ Guide to Window Installation as described in E2/AS1
Amendment 5 WANZ PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System WANZ SFA 3503-03 Anodic Oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural
application (2005) BRANZ BU 337 Protecting Window Glass from Surface Damage AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures
for high performance organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels
AAMA 2605 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for superior performing organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels
TT-S-001543A Sealing compound, silicone rubber base (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)
TT-S-00230C Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are contained within: Altherm Specifier's Guide First Specifier's Guide Vantage Specifier's Guide Copies of the above literature are available from:
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.altherm.co.nz www.firstwindows.co.nz www.vantagejoinery.com www.aplnz.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 309 3251 Facsimile: 09 309 3298
Provide a material manufacturer/fabricator warranty: 5 years: For fabrication Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For installation
� Provide this warranty in the installer/applicator standard form.
1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 65
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
Not required 1.7 SAMPLES
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified APL aluminium system, or associated components and products.
1.8 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
Windows and doors to be manufactured and installed to NZBC E2/AS1. 1.10 COMPLIANCE
Shop drawings to show the general arrangement of the aluminium joinery including, but not be limited to: Construction details (minimum scale 1:5) showing the interface between joinery elements and the building structure including: -
� Jointing details and method of fixing between individual elements and between this installation and adjacent work
� Interaction between claddings and linings � Flashing details � Sealants and air seals � Non standard fixing details including bracketing
And where required the following: -
� Rebate sizes � Dimensions of all typical elements and of any special sizes and shapes � Provision for the exclusion and/or drainage of moisture � Sealant types and full size sections of all sealants and backing rods � Provision for thermal movement � Provision for seismic movement and movement under wind loads � Sequence of installation � Glazing specification and details
Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide evidence of a certificate by a laboratory accredited by International Accreditation of New Zealand that the windows and doors offered comply with the requirements of NZS 4211.
Performance
1.12 CERTIFICATION
To NZS 4211, including: � deflection, opening sashes, air infiltration, water penetration, ultimate strength, torsional strength of
sashes, marking. Refer to SELECTIONS.
1.13 PERFORMANCE - WINDOWS AND DOORS
The structural and weather-tight performance of the completed joinery, the glazing and infill panels is the responsibility of the window fabricator.
Performance - Wind (design by contractor)
1.14 STRUCTURAL/WEATHER-TIGHTNESS
Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.1. Refer to SELECTIONS for wind zone.
Finishes
1.15 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
Certify on request, compliance with this specification and support with control and sampling records. Test for film thickness to BS 3900, part C5, method No. 4, using method (b) or to AS/NZ 1580.108.1 for certifying thickness and method (a) where any dispute arises as to the thickness provided.
1.16 CERTIFY COATINGS - POWDER COATING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 66
The coating should be applied by an applicator who can certify that the coating has been applied in accordance with the specification.
2 PRODUCTS
Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. 2.1 WINDOWS
Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. 2.2 DOORS
Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.
Materials
2.3 MAGNUM DOORS
Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866. Branded and extruded for anodising or powder coating. 2.4 ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS
Complying with AS/NZS 1734 of suitable thickness. Rolled for anodising or powder coating. 2.5 ALUMINIUM SHEET AND STRIP
Alloy designation: 5251 - H16 or 5005 - H16
Refer to 4611ME Metro Glasstech Exterior Glazing
2.6 GLASS
Timber reveals for paint finish with all sides primed grooved for wall linings or flush finished for architraves.
Accessories
2.7 REVEALS - TIMBER PAINTED
To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10 Windows and Doors. Material, grade and colour of head flashings to match the window frames. Ensure that materials used for head, jamb and sill flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials.
Components for installation - cavity systems
2.8 FLASHINGS GENERALLY
A device constructed from either aluminium or PVC to close the cavity above the window or door unit, between the cladding and head flashing, to provide ventilation in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 to the spaces above the window or door.
2.9 STANDARD CAVITY CLOSER
Extruded aluminium support bar with built in drainage and ventilation to NZBC E2/AS1, to provide continuous support to the window unit. Size to suit cladding type.
Components
2.10 WANZ SUPPORT BAR
Thermoplastic rubber. Do not stretch glazing gaskets during installation. Measure and cut gaskets 5-10% over length before installation.
2.11 GLAZING GASKETS
Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window and door manufacturer. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. Key alike all lockable window hardware able to be keyed alike.
2.12 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE
Stainless steel non releasable restrictors to limit window opening to NZBC F4/AS1, Table 2, Acceptable opening sizes for barriers. Top hung windows with restrictor stays to open a maximum of 150mm
2.13 SAFETY STAYS
Designed by manufacturer to specific design.
Sealants
2.14 FIXING BRACKETS
2.15 WEATHERING/INSTALLATION SEALANT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 67
Building sealant used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for weather sealing aluminium frames to the cladding, complying with US Federal Specification TT S 0011534A, or a one-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant of medium modulus (± 25% movement) to US Federal Specification TT S 00230C.
Finishes
Polyester powder organic coating in accordance with WANZ PQAS and AS 3715. 2.16 DURALLOY POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM
Conditions - generally
3 EXECUTION
Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable conditions of storage. 3.1 DO NOT DELIVER
Unload, handle and store elements in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 UNLOAD WINDOW JOINERY
Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling. 3.3 AVOID DISTORTION
Store windows and doors on site in a clean and dry environment in such a manner as to prevent damage to prefinished surfaces. Stack the units in a vertical position resting on their sills, with layers interleaved between to prevent rubbing. Keep paper and cardboard wrappings dry.
3.4 PREVENT DAMAGE
Retain protective coverings and coatings to BRANZ BU 337 and keep in place during the fixing process. Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.
Conditions - fixings and fastenings
3.5 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS
Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS. Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 316 stainless steel or if not exposed to the weather may they be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.
3.6 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS
To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10.8, Attachments for windows and doors. Fix windows/doors through reveal to frame with a pair of 75 x 3.15mm minimum galvanised jolt head nails or a pair of 8 gauge x 65mm minimum stainless steel screws. Fix at a maximum of 450 centres along all reveals and a maximum of 150mm from reveal ends. Ensure fixings do not penetrate metal flashings. Install packers between reveals and framing at fixing points, except at the head.
Assembly
3.7 INSTALLATION FIXING
Fabricate frames as detailed on shop drawings. Install fixing brackets, glazing, hinges, stays and running gear as scheduled. Provide temporary bracing and protection. Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.
3.8 FABRICATION
Before fixing to aluminium frames, ensure that timber reveals which are being painted have been primed on all surfaces. Securely fix reveals through aluminium fin.
3.9 TIMBER REVEALS
Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware. Account for all keys and deliver separately to the site manager.
3.10 HARDWARE GENERALLY
Factory fit safety stays to all windows scheduled for safety stays and to all windows where safety stays are required to comply with NZBC F4/AS1 4.0, Opening windows.
Installation - windows and doors
3.11 SAFETY STAYS
3.12 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 68
Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS.
Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 304 stainless steel. 3.13 EXPOSED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS
Fixings and fastenings not exposed to the weather may be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.
3.14 PROTECTED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS
Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, stops or underlays between dissimilar metals in contact, or between aluminium in contact with concrete.
3.15 CORROSION PROTECTION
Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames. Do not proceed with the window and door installation until required preparatory work has been completed. Required preparatory work includes the following:
� wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames to NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.5 Wall underlays to wall openings
� claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings � installation of flashings (those which are required to be installed prior to frames). � application of waterproof sealer to all door and window sills in concrete floor or concrete sill situations.
To door sills only, apply a suitable membrane over the sealer. � all in accordance with the shop drawings, where applicable.
3.16 CONFIRM PREPARATION OF EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS
Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details including flashings and bedding compounds, pointing sealants and weathering sealants.
3.17 INSTALLATION
Install to WANZ Installation Guide details and drawings including WANZ sill support bars. For thresholds with support bars fixed through membranes, pre-fill support bar screw holes with silicone sealant to NZBC E2/AS1, figure 62(d).
3.18 INSTALLATION CAVITY CONSTRUCTION
Install flashings to heads, jambs and sills of frames as supplied and required by the window manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. Finish head flashings to match window finish. Place all flashings so that the head flashing weathers the jamb flashings, which in turn weathers over the upstand of the sill flashing. Ensure that sill flashings drain to the outside air. Except where window/door frames are recessed, ensure that head flashings over-sail unit by 20mm plus any jamb scriber width at each end.
3.19 INSTALL FLASHINGS
To NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.6 Air seals. Form an air-tight seal by means of proprietary expanding foam or sealants used with PEF backing rods, applied between the window / door reveal and structural framing to a depth of 10 - 20mm, to provide a continuous air tight seal to the perimeter of the window or door.
3.20 COMPLETE AIR SEAL
Fix all sash and door hardware and furniture as scheduled.
Installation - Roof windows and overhead glazing system
3.21 FIX HARDWARE
Check that the trimmed openings are formed and constructed to suit the required units. Do not proceed until roof and structural openings are properly formed. Install flashings and overflashings as detailed and as required to make the installation completely weatherproof. Install and fix the roof window units strictly in accordance with the roof window manufacturer's requirements and installation instructions.
Application - jointing and sealing
3.22 INSTALL ROOF WINDOWS AND OVERHEAD GLAZING SYSTEMS
Seal frames to each other and to adjoining structure and finishes, to the requirements of the window and sealant manufacturer and to make the installation weathertight. In very high and extra high or greater wind zones, seal between the window head and the head flashing. Do not seal the junction between the sill member and the cladding or sill flashing which must remain open.
3.23 SEAL FRAMES ON SITE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 69
Ensure joints are dry. Remove loose material, dust and grease. Prepare joints in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements, using required solvents and primers where necessary. Mask adjoining surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant.
3.24 PREPARE JOINTS
When using back-up materials do not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the minimum required by the manufacturer of the sealant. Insert polyethylene rod or tape back-up behind joints being pointed with sealant.
3.25 BACK UP
Tool sealant to form a smooth fillet with a profile and dimensions required by the sealant manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces, using the cleaning materials nominated by the sealant manufacturer and leave clean.
Completion - cleaning
3.26 SEALANT FINISH
Remove trade debris by appropriate means on a floor by floor basis as each floor is completed and again before any work is covered up by others. Arrange for general removal.
3.27 REMOVE TRADE DEBRIS
Trade clean window frames, operable windows and doors, glass and other related surfaces inside and out at the time of installation to remove marks, dust and dirt, to enable a visual inspection of all surfaces.
Completion
3.28 TRADE CLEAN
Retain protective coverings and coatings and keep in place during the fixing process. Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.
3.29 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS
Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.30 REPLACE
Protect finishes against damage from adjacent and following work. 3.31 PROTECTION
In situ touch-up of polyester or fluoropolymer coated aluminium is only permitted to minor surface scratching. Otherwise replace all damaged material.
3.32 IN - SITU TOUCH-UP TO POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM
Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the contract period, with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface. Masking tape must not be used for this purpose.
3.33 SAFETY
Apply manifestations to comply with NZS 4223.3, 303.1 Manifestations. 3.34 MANIFESTATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to the following selections.
4 SELECTIONS
Supply and installation of the specified APL aluminium joinery system.
Performance
4.1 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION
Supply: By fabricator Installation: By main contractor
4.2 THERMAL PERFORMANCE
R-value: R0.26 (as determined from NZBC H1/VM1 or H1/AS1)
For NZS 4211, table 3 Air infiltration. 4.3 AIR INFILTRATION
Non-air conditioned zones:
Reception area to be air conditioned later
Air conditioned zones: Offices and staff areas
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 70
Performance - Wind (design by contractor)
Finishes
4.4 DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN
Building wind zone Medium 37 m/s (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.1)
GLAZING - REFER TO SECTION 4611ME BELOW
HARDWARE
4.5 DURALLOY - POWDER COATING FINISH
Type: Polyester organic powder coating System integrity: Minimum 10 years film integrity, 7 years colour integrity Thickness: Average of 80 microns with a minimum of 50 microns Colour: Palladium Silver Kinetic
4.6 WINDOW HARDWARE
Window fastener: Standard
Location Item All top hung opening sashes
Safety stays - non releasable
All top hung opening sashes
Sash locks
4.7 DOOR HARDWARE - REFER TO THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Flashings and Sealant
4.8 HARDWARE FINISH
Finish: Powder coat Colour: To be advised
4.9 FLASHINGS
Material/type: 0.55mm BMT Alum/zinc coated steel Pattern: Formed to suit details provided
Reveals
4.10 WEATHERING SEALANT
Type: Sikaflex MS sealant Colour:
WINDOW SYSTEM - APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES
4.11 TIMBER JAMB REVEALS
Timber species: Radiata pine Grade/treatment: Clears Thickness: 19mm Reveals: Grooved for wall linings Finish: Paint quality
Commercial doors
4.12 APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES - 40MM WINDOW SERIES
Brand: APL 40mm Window Series Type.: Chair frame Window No.: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.75 Glazing system: Double glazing
4.13 APL MAGNUM DOORS -
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 71
Brand/type: APL Magnum Doors - Pivot doors - single leaf Door No.: nd.01, nd.02 Pivot door frame 40mm Window Series, extended head transom Top rail type: Wide Vision rail: Profile ref 08024 Bottom rail type: Wide Stile type: Wide
4.14 SUN SHADING PANEL SUPPORT MEMBERS - REFER RO DRAWING 1535 GD.21
Sub frame 40 x 40 x 3 aluminium box section Top support members 40 x 40 x 5 aluminium box section Bottom stabilising members
40 x 40 x 3 aluminium box section
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 72
4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING
This section relates to the supply and fixing of Metro GlassTech products for external joinery in complex residential and commercial buildings, including:
� window and doors
1 GENERAL
Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors 1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
PVB Polyvinyl Butyral CIP Cast in place
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 4211 Specification for performance of windows NZS 4218 Thermal insulation - Housing and Small Buildings NZS 4223.1 Glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements NZS 4223.4 Glazing in buildings - Wind, dead, snow and live action NZS 4223.Supp1 Glazing in buildings - Supplement 1 to NZS 4223.1:2008 and NZS
4223.4:2008 AS/NZS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings AS/NZS 4666 Insulating glass units BRANZ BU 337 Protecting window glass from damage
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Metro GlassTech Catalogue & Reference Guide - 6th edition Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Metro GlassTech Web: www.metroglasstech.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 65 89 45
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of completion of this part of the contract work.
Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
10 years: for insulating glass units 10 years: for laminated safety glass 10 years: for toughened safety glass 10 years: for screen printed glass
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 73
Submit samples of selected glass for review if required.
Performance
1.6 SAMPLES
For non heat treated glass obtain a thermal stress analysis for spandrel panels, tinted, reflective and other solar control vision glass including IGU's for review before placing final order.
1.7 THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS
Provide glazing to meet the energy requirements of, NZS 4218 and NZBC H1/AS1 for housing small buildings, or NZS 4243.1 for large buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS and schedules for location and type of glazing.
1.8 ENERGY EFFICIENCY
2 PRODUCTS
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Metro GlassTech, products or systems.
Materials
2.1 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Clear ordinary annealed transparent float glass for general window glazing. Thickness to NZS 4223.1 and NZS 4223. Supp 1.
2.2 CLEAR FLOAT GLASS
Translucent, annealed, rolled glass with a decorative pattern on one surface. 2.3 TEXTURED, PATTERNED OR OBSCURE GLASS
With 13mm square welded, treated steel wire mesh in the centre. 2.4 WIRED GLASS
Safelite Grade A Safety Glass to AS/NZS 2208 with PVB or CIP resin interlayer. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
Body tinted float glass. 2.6 TINTED FLOAT GLASS
IGU's to AS/NZS 4666 and the IGU Manufacturers Association (IGUMA) requirements.
Components, general
2.7 GLASSTECH INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S)
Ensure jointing, putty and sealing materials are compatible with glass substrates. Confirm compatibility with laminated glass, IGU's and coatings.
Components, timber glazing
2.8 JOINTING, PUTTY AND SEALING MATERIALS
Linseed oil base glazing putty. Not to be used with Tinted, Laminate or IGU's 2.9 PUTTY, TIMBER FRAME
Diamond metal pieces to retain glass in timber sashes and frames. 2.10 SPRIGS
Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam tapes/butyl tapes for bead glazing.
2.11 GLAZING TAPE
PVC or Santoprene to window manufacturers' requirements. 2.12 GASKETS
Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to support the weight of glass panes. Use with bead glazing and for IGU's.
Components, aluminium glazing
2.13 SETTING BLOCKS
2.14 GLAZING TAPE AND GASKETS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 74
Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam tapes/butyl tapes selected to suit the glazing detail to window manufacturers' requirements.
Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to support the weight of glass panes.
2.15 SETTING BLOCKS
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
To NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing. All external glazing is wind and watertight on completion.
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Keep glass dry and clean during delivery and bring on to site when ready to glaze directly into place. Comply also with the storage requirements set out in BRANZ BU 337.
3.2 DELIVERY
All glass to have undamaged edges and surfaces in accordance with AS/NZS 4667. 3.3 GLASS CONDITION
If not specifically stated in the glazing schedule determine the minimum thickness of glass for each sheet as required by NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4 and NZS 4223. Supp 1. For windows tested to NZS 4211, ensure glass meets the requirements of the window testing. Determine the final glass thickness based on whether wind loading or human impact considerations govern.
3.4 GLASS THICKNESS
Provide rebates for glazing to the widths and depths necessary for each situation including minimum glass edge cover to NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing.
Conditions - human impact safety requirements
3.5 REBATE DIMENSIONS
Glazing of doors, side panels, low level and window seat glazing, stairwell landings and similar locations to NZS 4223.3 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing, in respect of thickness, maximum areas and requirements for Grade A Safety Glass.
3.6 SAFETY GLAZING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Use only materials from NZS 4223.3, Appendix 3.A Schedule of safety glazing materials that also comply with the relevant requirements of AS/NZS 2208. Ensure material is permanently marked and if cut by the distributor or installer mark each piece to NZS 4223.3, clause 303.7 Identification of safety glazing materials.
3.7 SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL
Edge cover to comply with NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing, table 5. Otherwise to NZS 4223.3, clause 303.2 Containment.
3.8 CONTAINMENT
To NZS 4223.3, section 309 Shop front glazing, noting particularly adequate edge cover to retain glass under load and manifestation requirements.
Assembly
3.9 SHOP FRONTS
All working of glass as required in NZS 4223.1. 3.10 WORKING OF GLASS
Edgework other than a clean cut. Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type. 3.11 EDGE WORK AND BEVELLING
Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. 3.12 SURFACE TREATMENT
Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish.
Application aluminium
3.13 SURFACE CUTTING
Install glass to NZS 4223.1. 3.14 INSTALL GLASS TO ALUMINIUM FRAMES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 75
� Bead glaze to Section 4 Glazing. � Channel glaze to Section 4 Glazing, and Section 5 for Framed, Unframed, Partly Framed Glass
Assemblies.
To NZS 4223.3, as modified by NZBC F2/AS1 and NZBC B1/AS1, 7.0 Glazing.
Finishing
3.15 INSTALL SAFETY GLASS
Indicate the presence of transparent glass for the construction period with tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface.
3.16 SAFETY
To NZS 4223.3, clause 303.1 Manifestation (making glass visible).
Completion
3.17 MANIFESTATIONS
Remove safety indicators and trade clean at completion of the building. 3.18 TRADE CLEAN
Replace damaged, cracked or marked glass that occurs during glazing. 3.19 REPLACE
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.21 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.metroglasstech.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Performance - wind
4 SELECTIONS
Building wind zone: Medium (as determined from NZS 3604, NZS 4223)
Glass by type
4.1 WIND ZONE - NON-SPECIFIC DESIGN
4.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - DOORS ND.01, ND.02
Location: Entrance doors Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Laminated Body Tinted Coated surface: 1
Outer glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm Spacer width: 10mm
Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Laminated Safety glass Coated surface: Clear glass
Inner glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm
4.3 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - RECEPTION AREA WINDOWS
Location: Reception area windows Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Laminated Body Tinted for both bottom rows
Annealed glass for the top row of windows and windows above the veranda roof
Coated surface: 1
Outer glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm Spacer width: 10mm
Space gas: Air
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 76
Inner glass type: Laminated Safety glass - for both bottom rows of windows Annealed glass for the top row of windows and all windows above the veranda roof
Coated surface: Clear glass
Inner glass: 3 + 1 + 3mm for laminated 6mm for annealed
4.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - WINDOWS GENERALLY
Location: Office areas, staff areas and utility areas Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Body Tinted Coated surface: 1
Outer glass: 6mm Spacer width: 10mm
Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Annealed glass Coated surface: n/a
Inner glass: 6mm
4.5 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU'S) - WINDOWS ND.13, 14, 15, 16 - WC'S
Location: Reception area windows Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) Outer glass type: Annealed glass Coated surface: n/a
Outer glass: 5mm Spacer width: 12mm
Space gas: Air Inner glass type: Annealed glass - frosted Coated surface: n/a
Inner glass: 5mm
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH EXTERIOR GLAZING Page 77
4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION
This section relates to Tasman Insulation Pink® Batts® insulation materials installed into residential buildings. It includes: Thermal:
� Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®) � Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®
Acoustic: � Pink® Batts® Wall insulation
Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, GA.15, GA.40 to 44 and GD.20, 21, 22
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 5113G GIB Plasterboard linings Refer to 5311F Forman Suspended Tile Ceiling Systems Refer to 5313F Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient STC Sound Transmission Class IIC Impact Insulation Class
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations NZS 4218:2004 Energy Efficiency - Small building envelope NZS 4220 Code of practice for energy conservation in non-residential buildings NZS 4246 Energy efficiency - Installing insulation in residential buildings AS/NZS 60598.2.2 Luminaires- Particular Requirements - Recessed luminaires AS/NZS 60695.11.5 Fire hazard testing - Test flames - Needle-flame test method - Apparatus,
conformity test arrangement and guidance
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: Tasman Insulation New Zealand: Product Data Sheets BRANZ Appraisal 632 - Pink® Batts® SnugFloor® Underfloor Insulation Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Tasman Insulation New Zealand Web: www.pinkbatts.co.nz Telephone: 0800 PINK BATTS (746 522)
Provide a Tasman insulation guarantee.
� For Pink® Batts® insulation products. � Provide on completion of the installation, a PinkFit® Home Insulation Installation Guarantee form,
to confirm the insulation has been installed to NZS 4246.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS, PINK® BATTS® AND PINK® BATTS® SILENCER®
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 78
Installers to be PinkFit® - Preferred Pink® Batts® installers. A list of approved installers can be obtained from the web, by telephone or from the local building supplies merchant. Web: www.pinkbatts.co.nz Telephone: Freephone 0800 746 534 (0800 PINKFIT)
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Tasman Insulation Pink® Batts® insulation or associated products, components or accessories.
Performance
1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Provide sound rated wall, floor and ceiling systems as scheduled. 1.8 SOUND RATING REQUIREMENTS
Materials - thermal
2 PRODUCTS
Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®) is a light weight flexible bio-soluble glass wool manufactured from up to 80% recycled glass, bonded with a thermosetting resin to form rectangular slabs. Refer to SELECTIONS for R values and thickness options. NOTE: When insulation abutting or covering recessed downlights is intended to be in contact with IC, CA 80, CA 135 luminaries the insulation must withstand a 30s Needle Flame test to AS/NZS 60695.11.5. Pink® Batts® insulation meets this requirement.
2.1 PINK® BATTS® CEILING INSULATION
Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation (Pink® Batts® Classic and Pink® Batts® Ultra®)is a light weight flexible bio-soluble glass wool manufactured from up to 80% recycled glass, bonded with a thermosetting resin to form rectangular slabs. Refer to SELECTIONS for R values and thickness options.
Components
2.2 PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION - ALSO ACOUSTIC
Insul anchors complete with retaining washer. 2.3 FASTENERS
Proprietary plastic tape stapled across framing to retain insulation in unlined wall and ceiling locations. 2.4 TAPES
Pressure sensitive adhesive tape. 2.5 ADHESIVE TAPE
3 EXECUTION
Accept materials undamaged and dry and store in a location that protects them from the weather and damage. Avoid distortion, stretching, compression, puncturing and damage to edges of materials. Do not use damaged or wet insulation materials.
3.1 STORAGE
Wear protective clothing as necessary and when handling, avoid delamination or distortion of the rectangular form. Maintain full thickness unless compression is an installation system requirement.
3.2 HANDLING
Before starting installation of blankets and slabs, check that the location and framing are free from moisture, that the cavities are not interconnected and that mesh, wall underlays and vapour barriers are in place.
Application - general
3.3 INSPECTION
Lay, install, fit and fix to NZBC H1/AS1: Energy efficiency, 2.0 Building thermal envelope, and to manufacturer's requirements. Install in housing to NZS 4218 and NZS 4246. Install in large buildings to NZS 4243.1 and NZS 4220. Allow insulation to re-loft/relax prior to installation. Do not cover vents. Allow a clear gap around metal flues as recommended by the fireplace manufacturer. Lift up electrical wires, lighting transformers/controllers and lay the insulation underneath.
3.4 INSTALL INSULATION - GENERAL
Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights
3.5 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 79
� 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9. � Provide larger clearances where required by the light manufacturer.
Application, thermal insulation
Ensure that the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation. If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit. Insulate around vents (not over them) to allow unhindered ventilation. Fit Pink® Batts® Ceiling Insulation beneath electrical wiring and plumbing. Install to the outer edge of the top plate. Maintain a 25mm gap clearance between the Pink® Batts® insulation and roof underlay. Refer to NZS 4246 for installation guidelines and Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installation instructions.
3.6 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® CEILING INSULATION
Ensure the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation. If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit. Fill gaps around windows and doors with off-cuts. Insulate around vents (not over them) to allow unhindered ventilation. Fit Pink® Batts® Wall Insulation behind electrical wiring and plumbing. Ensure there are no gaps, folds or undesirable compression at edges. Refer to NZS 4246 for installation guidelines and Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installation instructions.
3.7 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION
Ensure that the product is installed dry; if wet replace before installation. If cutting is required, cut oversize by 5mm-10mm to ensure a friction fit.
Application, acoustic insulation
3.8 FIT PINK® BATTS® SKILLION ROOF INSULATION
Install Pink® Batts® Silencer® when lining on one side is installed. When cutting is required, cut oversize by 5-10mm to ensure a friction fit to completely fill the whole of the cavities. Fill gaps around with off-cuts. Fit Pink® Batts® insulation behind electrical wiring and plumbing. Ensure there are no gaps, folds or undesirable compression at edges. Maintain full thickness of the insulating panels over the whole of the installation. Refer to Pink® Batts® Product Data Sheets, for detailed installations.
Completion
3.9 INSTALL PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION
Clean up as the work proceeds, so no spare offcuts or any other matter or item remain behind claddings or linings.
3.10 CLEAN UP
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.11 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.12 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.pinkbatts.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Thermal insulation
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 PINK® BATTS® CLASSIC CEILING INSULATION
Location: At bottom of truss chords between grid lines 4 and 8, and in the skillion roof between grid lines 1 and 4
Brand: Pink® Batts® Classic Ceiling R-value: R3.2 Thickness: 170mm
Acoustic Insulation
4.2 PINK® BATTS® CLASSIC WALL INSULATION
Location: All timber framed external walls Brand: Pink® Batts® Classic Wall R-value: R2.2 Thickness: 90mm
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 80
4.3 PINK® BATTS® WALL INSULATION
Location: In internal partitions marked SND on drawing 1535 GA.15 Brand/type: Pink® Batts® Wall insulation System STC: 42 (90mm framing; side 1, 13mm GIB Noiseline/ side 2, 13mm GIB
Noiseline) Thickness: 90mm
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 4710P PINK® BATTS® & PINK® BATTS® SILENCER® INSULATION Page 81
5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS
This section relates to the supply, fixing and jointing of GIB® plasterboard linings and accessories to timber and steel framed walls and ceilings to form:
� standard systems � bracing systems � wet area systems
Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 15, 18, 19, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22. Allow to provide a 13mm GIB Board ceiling lining at 2500 above ffl in the accessible W.C.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4710P Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 5313F Forman Concealed Suspended Ceiling System Refer to 5151 Internal Trim
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries New Zealand
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS2-AS6 Protection from fire NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc
and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium AS/NZS 2588 Gypsum plasterboard AS/NZS 2589 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures ISO 5660.1 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss
rate - Part 1: Heat release rate (cone calorimeter method) ISO 5660.2 Reaction-to-fire tests - Heat release, smoke production and mass loss
rate - Part 2: Smoke production rate (dynamic measurement)
BRANZ Technical Paper P21
BRANZ Technical Paper P21: A wall bracing test and evaluation procedure (2010)
NASH Residential and Low-Rise Steel Framing Part 1 2010 Design Criteria
Manufacturer’s and supplier’s documents relating to this part of the work: � GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) � GIB® Noise Control Systems (March 2006) � GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems (March 2007) � GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) � GIB® Ezybrace® Software (2011), with amendments (Dec 2014) � GIB® Rondo® Metal Ceiling Batten Systems � GIB-Cove® � GIB® Goldline™ Platinum Tape-on Trims (Jan 2006) � GIB® UltraFlex® high impact corner mould (Sept 2004)
BRANZ Appraisal 294 (2011) - GIB® Ezybrace® Systems BRANZ Appraisal 427 (2007) - GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems GreenTag Certification - GreenTag™ GreenRate/Level C for:
� GIB® Standard (10mm & 13mm) � GIB Braceline® (10mm & 13mm) � GIB® Noiseline® (10mm & 13mm)
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 82
Copies of the above literature are available at
Requirements
Company: Winstone Wallboards Web: www.gib.co.nz Telephone: 0800 100 442
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified GIB® systems, GIB® system components, GIB® plasterboard, associated GIB® products or GIB® accessories.
1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
GIB® plasterboard fixers and plasterers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with GIB® plasterboard lining systems installation and finishing techniques. Submit evidence of experience on request. For example:
� National Certificate of Interior Systems; or � Certified Business member of AWCINZ.
Performance
1.6 INSTALLER WORK SKILLS AND QUALIFICATIONS
Allow for inspection of the finished plasterboard surface: � before applying sealer and � before applying finish coatings or decorative papers,
so that after assessment of the type and/or angle of illumination and its effect on the completed decorative treatment, group approval and acceptance of the surface can be given.
1.7 INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE
Provide the GIB® Noise Control Systems. Refer to SELECTIONS for system/STC. Include for forming and treating of perimeters of openings and penetrations in the elements to ensure the specified performance. Ensure absence of adjoining flanking paths.
1.8 SOUND INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
Provide braced wall systems using GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011) or GIB® Ezybrace® Software (2011) to meet the requirements of NZS 3604 when tested to BRANZ Technical Paper P21. Alternatively use GIB® Ezybrace® for Steel Frame Housing (NASH) Software 2011 to meet the requirements of NASH Residential and Low-Rise Steel Framing Part 1 2010 Design Criteria. Refer to drawings for location and type.
1.9 BRACING REQUIREMENTS
All GIB® unfinished plasterboard sheet materials achieve a Group Classification of, Group 1-S to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.1, following testing in accordance with ISO 5660.1 and ISO 5660.2.
1.10 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES - UNFINISHED BOARD
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Gypsum plaster core encased in a face and backing paper formed for standard and water resistance use to AS/NZS 2588. Refer to SELECTIONS for location, type, thickness and finish. GIB® Standard plasterboard GIB Braceline® & GIB® Noiseline® dual purpose wall bracing & noise control plasterboard GIB Aqualine® wet area plasterboard
2.1 GIB® PLASTERBOARD
GIB-Cove® plasterboard cornice. Refer to SELECTIONS for profile and size.
Components
2.2 CORNICE
GIB® Rondo® metal ceiling battens, batten joiners and perimeter channel. 2.3 CEILING BATTENS
GIB® Grabber® drywall screws. 2.4 SCREWS
GIB® Nails (gold passivated). 2.5 NAILS
Size: 30mm, 40mm
GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims 2.6 TAPE ON TRIMS AND EDGES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 83
GIB® galvanized steel slim angle trims. 2.7 METAL ANGLE TRIMS
GIB® Rondo® P35 control joints. GIB® Goldline™ tape-on trims
Accessories
2.8 CONTROL JOINTS
Timber frame and/or steel frame: GIBFix® One ultra low VOC water based wallboard adhesive GIBFix® All-Bond solvent based wallboard adhesive
2.9 ADHESIVE
2.10 JOINTING COMPOUND
Bedding compound: GIB Tradeset®, GIB Lite Blue®, GIB MaxSet®, GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB Plus 4®
Finishing compound: GIB ProMix® All Purpose, GIB® Trade Finish®, GIB® Trade Finish® Lite, GIB ProMix® Lite, GIB® U-Mix, GIB Plus 4®, GIB Trade Finish® Multi
Cove: GIB-Cove® Bond
GIB® paper jointing tape. 2.11 JOINTING TAPE
GIB Soundseal® ultra low VOC water based highly flexible acoustic sealant. 2.12 ACOUSTIC SEALANT
GIB® Gap Filler ultra low VOC multi-purpose acrylic flexible filler 2.13 GAP FILLER
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Store GIB® plasterboard sheets and accessories in dry conditions stored indoors out of direct sunlight in neat flat stacks on either an impervious plastic sheet or clear of the floor with no sagging and avoiding damage to ends, edges and surfaces. Reject damaged material. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).
3.1 STORAGE
Provide the selected plasterboard surfaces to the pre decorative levels of finish specified in AS/NZS 2589. 3.2 LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH
Before commencing work, agree in writing upon the surface finish assessment procedure towards ensuring that the quality of finish expectations are reasonable and are subsequently obtained and acceptable. Do not apply decorative treatment until it is agreed in writing by the contractor, subcontractors and decorator that the specified plasterboard Level of Finish has been achieved. "Levels of plasterboard finish" is a tool for specifying the required quality of finish when installing and flush stopping GIB® plasterboard prior to the application of a range of decorative finishes under various lighting conditions. Refer to AS/NZS 2589.
3.3 CONFIRM LEVELS OF PLASTERBOARD FINISH ACCEPTANCE
Do not commence work until the substrate is plumb, level and to the standard required by the sheet manufacturer's requirements. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).
3.4 SUBSTRATE
Maximum allowable moisture content to AS/NZS 2589 for timber framing at lining: 18% or less for plasterboard linings. Refer to NZBC E2/AS1 and GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).
3.5 TIMBER FRAME MOISTURE CONTENT
Protect surfaces; cabinetwork, fittings, equipment and finishes already in place from the possibility of water staining and stopping damage. Refer to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014).
Application
3.6 PROTECTION
Install to GIB® Rondo® Ceiling Batten Systems requirements. 3.7 INSTALL CEILING BATTENS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 84
Form to GIB® Site Guide (Jan 2010). Ensure bulk insulation thickness shall not exceed that of the wall framing.
3.8 LINING WALLS AND CEILINGS GENERALLY
Minimise joints by careful sheet layout using the largest sheet sizes possible, and generally fixing horizontally. Where part sheets are required for various stud heights they should be positioned so the cut sheet is as low as possible to keep joints below eye level.
3.9 BOARD ORIENTATION
Form to GIB® Noise Control Systems requirements. 3.10 FORM NOISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Form to GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems requirements. 3.11 FORM WET AREA SYSTEMS
Form to GIB® Ezybrace® Systems (June 2011) requirements. 3.12 FORM BRACING SYSTEMS
Form control joints to GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) requirements. 3.13 FORM CONTROL JOINTS
Install to GIB-Cove® literature using GIB-Cove® Bond. 3.14 INSTALL COVES
Install to GIB® Goldline™ Tape-on trims literature and/or GIB® Ultraflex high impact corner mould literature.
Finishing
3.15 INSTALL TAPE-ON TRIMS
To GIB® Site Guide (Dec 2014) and AS/NZS 2589.
Completion
3.16 FINISHING GENERALLY
Replace damaged sheets or elements. 3.17 REPLACE
Clean down completed surfaces to remove irregularities and finally sand down with fine paper to the sheet manufacturer's requirements, to leave completely smooth and clean.
3.18 CLEAN DOWN
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.19 REMOVE
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE
Plasterboard
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS WALLS
Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements
Thickness Finish Level
Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15
GIB® Standard plasterboard 13mm Level 4
4.2 GIB® WATER RESISTANT SYSTEMS WALLS
Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements
Thickness Finish Level
Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15
GIB Aqualine® plasterboard 13mm Level 4
4.3 GIB® STANDARD SYSTEMS CEILINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 85
Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements
Thickness Finish Level
Ceiling systems as noted on drawing 1535 GA.18
GIB® Standard plasterboard 13mm Level 4
4.4 GIB® WATER RESISTANT SYSTEMS CEILINGS
Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements
Thickness Finish Level
Timber framed walls as noted on drawing 1535 GA.15
GIB Aqualine® plasterboard 13mm Level 4
Refer to GIB® Noise Control Systems 4.5 GIB® SOUND RATED SYSTEMS
Location Plasterboard type / Lining requirements
STC / System specification
Finish Level
~ ~ ~ ~
Refer to GIB® Ezybrace® Systems. For bracing element location refer to drawn documentation.
Accessories
4.6 GIB® BRACING SYSTEMS
4.7 GIB® RONDO® CEILING BATTENS
Brand/type: GIB® Rondo® Ceiling battens
4.8 GIB® TAPE ON EDGE OR CORNER TRIMS
Brand/type: GIB Goldline tape-on trims
4.9 GIB® EDGE PROFILES
Brand/type: Negative detail in flat ceiling areas - preformed steel folded strip
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS Page 86
5151 INTERNAL TRIM
This section relates to simple lengths of trim fixed on site as of isolated internal members, with simple end joints. It includes:
� Timber skirtings � MDF facings
Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 13, 15, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 and GD.20, 21, 22.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows and Doors Refer to 5113G GIB Plasterboard linings Refer to 5230 Interior doors
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings NZS 3610 Specification for profiles of mouldings and joinery
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Carters Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Performance
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Carter Holt Harvey Wood Products Ltd Web: www.chhproducts.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 326 759
For all Risk Groups covered by NZBC C/AS2-AS7. All trim to have the appropriate Group Number to match that of the wall or ceiling to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, table 4.1. Except that, there is no requirement for trim that does not exceed 5% of the wall or ceiling area to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.d).
1.4 FIRE PROPERTIES
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
To NZS 3610 and to profiles detailed on the drawings. Timber species, grade and treatment to NZS 3602. 2.1 TIMBER TRIM
Refer to SELECTIONS for type.
Components
2.2 MDF TRIM
Bright steel to dimension requirements of NZS 3604. Use galvanized where prone to dampness. 2.3 NAILS
Bright steel of a length three times the thickness of the member being fixed. Use cadmium plated where prone to dampness.
2.4 BRADS
2.5 SCREWS, STEEL
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 87
Bright steel of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank. Use stainless steel in wet areas.
Chrome plated of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank. 2.6 SCREWS, CHROME PLATED
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
To comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification. Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).
3.1 GENERALLY
Take delivery of trims undamaged and unmarked and store on site under cover, away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight in adequately ventilated area and clear of areas where work is in progress, to ensure materials are of the required standard when fixed in place.
3.2 STORAGE
Remove materials from packaging, separate and allow to acclimatise in the proposed installation area for 48 hours minimum prior to installation.
3.3 ACCLIMATISE MATERIALS
Ensure that the substrate to trims will allow work of the required standard. If it does not, do not proceed until the substrate has been remedied.
Application - Generally
3.4 ENSURE
Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and, mitred and returned at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using nails or brads to suit. Leave secure and with no movement possible.
Application - MDF trim
3.5 INSTALL TIMBER TRIM
Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on itself at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using 40mm or 50mm brads to suit, ensuring fixing to a minimum depth of 25mm into framing timber. Leave secure and with no movement possible. Punch brads and fill with stopping compound to maintain the smooth surface.
Finishing
3.6 NAIL FIX
Punch all nail heads below the face of trim ready to receive stopping, as specified under painting preparation.
Completion
3.7 PUNCH
Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following procedures.
3.8 LEAVE
Protect the completed work and make good before any surface finish is applied. 3.9 PROTECTION
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.10 REPLACE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 INTERNAL TIMBER TRIM
Manufacturer: Carters Species/grade: Radiata pine / clears Finish: Paint
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 88
Member Reference Code reference Skirtings
65 x 12 single bevel
4.2 INTERNAL MDF TRIM
Manufacturer: Daiken Customwood New Zealand Ltd Finish Paint Member Code or description Window facings 12mm x 60mm single bevel
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 89
5230 INTERIOR DOORS
This section relates to the supply and installation of hinged, cavity sliding and sliding interior doors. it also includes 2 no. solid core external doors Refer to drawing 1535 GA.70 Door Schedule and GA.12 Floor Plan References
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3610 Specification form profiles of mouldings and joinery
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Renall Doors Ltd Copies of the above literature are available from ~
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.renalldoors.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 06 379 8066 Facsimile: 06 379 7079
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: CS for Doors Copies of the above literature are available from ~
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.csfordoors.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 276 0800 Mobile: 021 630 800
2 PRODUCTS
To NZS 3602. 2.1 TIMBER
Traditional profiles to NZS 3610. Proprietary profiles and special profiles as detailed. Pencil radius corners of profiled schedules for paint finish.
2.2 PROFILES, FACINGS, SCRIBERS AND ARCHITRAVES
Doors as scheduled complete with matching 6mm clashing strip to both sides and to the exposed edge of cavity slider doors.
2.3 DOORS, TIMBER VENEER
Doors as scheduled (without clashing strips). 2.4 DOORS, PAINTED
Doors hung within a proprietary cavity slider frame and complete with brand-matched sliding door gear. 2.5 CAVITY SLIDERS
Size and gauge to carry door. 3 hinges per door. 2.6 DOOR HINGES
To suit door/sash size and glazed weight and as detailed. 2.7 SLIDING DOOR GEAR
3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE MEASURE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 90
Confirm framed openings on site for dimension, plumb and straightness prior to fabrication or ordering of timber joinery. Confirm lintel head and sill deflection for sliding or bi-fold door systems is within the manufacturer's specified tolerances. Provide not less than 10mm unless otherwise required.
Manufacture to the methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).
3.2 EXECUTION GENERALLY
Factory fit the following where specified: - � Hinges
3.3 FACTORY FIT HARDWARE
Before delivery to site: - � Brace square and provide protection to assemblies during delivery to site. Where factory glazed,
indicate the presence of transparent glasses with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type.
Internal doors
3.4 FACTORY FINISHING
Fabricate as detailed. Wedge and rigidly fix in place without distortion, plumb, and true to line and face. Pre drill for fixings through frame. Countersink and plug frames scheduled for clear finish.
3.5 INTERNAL JOINERY FRAMES
Heads and jambs finished minimum 18mm, with 10mm planted door stops. Width to match width of lined walls. Hang doors on hinges, sliding, or sliding-folding gear to the door manufacturer's requirements and to operate freely. Countersink and plug frames scheduled for clear finish. Fit hardware.
3.6 DOOR LINERS
Install in accordance with the door manufacturer's requirements, allowing for removal of top trim for maintenance.
Completion
3.7 CAVITY SLIDERS
Check and adjust operation of all sashes, doors, hardware and furniture. 3.8 CHECK
On completion remove any temporary protection and leave ready for following work. 3.9 TEMPORARY PROTECTION
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SOLID CORE DOORS - EXTERNAL - ND.11, ND.13
Brand/type: Renall interior solid core doors Door facing: Timber Glazing: Timber beaded viewing panel Finish: Paint Glass: 5mm annealed Hardware: Refer to hardware schedule
4.2 CAVITY SLIDER DOORS - ND.04, ND.16
Brand/type: CS for Doors - SofStop cavity slider Door size: 810 x 1980 Finish: Paint Hardware: As supplied by door manufacturer
4.3 SOLID CORE DOORS - INTERNAL
Brand/type: Renall interior solid core doors Door facing: MDF Glazing: N/A Finish: Paint Glass: N/A Hardware: Refer to hardware schedule
4.4 SLIDING DOOR GEAR
Brand/type: Refer to the hardware schedule
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 91
Accessories
Interior doors 4.5 DOOR HINGES
Type: Loose pin Size: 89mm Material: Zinc-plated steel Pin: Loose-pin zinc-plated steel
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5230 INTERIOR DOORS Page 92
5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS
This section relates to the supply and installation of Forman Building Systems suspended tile ceiling systems, including;
� Suspension system � Ceiling tiles � Grid � Perimeter trim profile � All elements offered by the manufacturer to complete the system
Refer to drawing 1535 GA.18 Reflected ceiling plan and GA.40 to 44 Cross Sections
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4710P Pink Batts and Pink Batts Silencer Insulation
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient CAC Ceiling attenuation class STC Sound transmission class
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1530.3 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -
Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release
AS 1530.4 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures - Fire -resistance test of elements of construction
AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface
requirements for physical compatibility ASTM C423 Test method for sound absorption and sound absorption coefficients by
the reverberation room method ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms
sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method)
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:
Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Requirements
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Armstrong: Including grid systems and accessories, 30 year warranty, installation, maintenance, safety data sheets, Green Star Assessment, Environmental Choice.
Company: Forman Building Systems Ltd Web: www.forman.co.nz/products.php Telephone: 0800 45 4000
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 93
Allow to erect a sample section of the suspended ceiling system offered. Subject to confirmation in writing, the sample section may form part of the completed installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location of sample section.
1.6 SAMPLE SECTION
To AS/NZS 2785. Installation by a manufacturer's accredited installer, using the manufacturer's technical services. Provide evidence of experience, listing completed projects of similar size and complexity. Installation of Firefly Cavity Barriers must be by trained installers. Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1. Installation to comply with the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 5.9 Ducting, 5.14 Luminaires and 5.13 Ceiling-suspended equipment and equipment in ceiling voids.
1.7 INSTALLATION
Supply information on the materials and method of cleaning the ceiling system over its expected life. 1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Provide spare matching ceiling elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS. Deliver into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times.
Performance
1.9 SPARES
Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 or NZS 1170.5. 1.10 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT
Provide: � certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation � certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of performance
specified � a Producer Statement on completion.
1.11 CERTIFICATION
Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. Use an independent testing authority to test a specimen of the ceiling system to ASTM C423 and ASTM E1414, and submit the results for acceptance.
1.12 ACOUSTIC REQUIREMENTS
The Group Number Classification to NZBC C/AS2-C/AS6, table 4.1, has been determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, following testing to ISO 5660.1.
All other Forman ceiling tile products tested to AS/NZS 1530.3. Refer to SELECTIONS for tested products.
1.13 FORMAN PRODUCT FIRE GROUP NUMBERS
Product Group Number Armstrong, Eurocoustic and Parafon ceiling tile range 1 - S
Design the ceiling system, including cavity fire and smoke barriers where required, so that together with the floor it is to NZBC C/AS1-C/AS7 when tested to AS 1530.4. Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.
1.14 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENT
Design the ceiling system for use over its expected life without deterioration. Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.
1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.16 REFLECTANCE
Materials - Armstrong two way exposed grid system
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Grid finish/colour: Armstrong global white
2.2 PERIMETER TRIM - STEEL
Brand/form: Armstrong PeakForm perimeter trim by Forman Building Systems Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel Finish/colour: Armstrong global white Wall angle trim: Shadowline wall angle trim
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 94
Supplied by Forman Building Systems.
Components
2.3 CEILING TILES
25mm x 6 gauge non-rusting Type S self-drilling and self-tapping buglehead screws. 2.4 SCREWS
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between suspension members and luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of extra hangers and fixings. Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific ceiling tiles below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.
3.1 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES
Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight, and mechanical and electrical duct work above the ceiling completed.
3.2 SITE CONDITIONS
Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.3 COMPLY
Ensure that conditions are suitable for the ceiling installation. Arrange for the programming of the work to suit required practice.
Application
3.4 RESPONSIBILITY
Install the system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards and the ceiling manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 INSTALL
Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.
3.6 ACCESSIBILITY
Accommodate recessed light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or mechanical services that are fixed to or pass through the ceiling system. Provide independent support for these as necessary.
3.7 PENETRATIONS
Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation.
Completion
3.8 PROTECT EXISTING WORK
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.9 REPLACE
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.11 REMOVE
Clean soiled or marked units. 3.12 CLEAN
For further details on selections go to www.forman.co.nz/products.php Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 SPARES
Packs: Allow for 2% of the ceiling tile quantity as spares
4.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 95
Acoustic
Grid and tile system
NRC: 0.70 minimum Attenuation Class: 30 minimum room to room
4.3 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Module size: 1200mm x 600mm Face dimension: 24mm Perimeter: Shadowline wall angle
4.4 CEILING TILES
Brand: Armstrong Type: Square Edge Pattern: Dune Max Thickness: 20mm Size: 1200mm x 600mm to suit grid Edge profile: Square Edge
Rondo Panther access panels. 4.5 RONDO PANTHER ACCESS PANEL
FRR: 30 mins Acoustic rating: STC 30 Finish/colour: White Size: 600mm x 600mm Edge: Standard Lock: Budget lock
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 96
5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
This section relates to the supply and installation of Forman Building Systems suspended sheet or flush ceiling systems, comprising of:
� Rondo furring channel system, supporting screw fixed sheet materials, � all elements offered by the manufacturer to complete the system.
The ceiling linings are perforated corrugated steel sheet and are located above the new reception area. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.18, GA.40 to 44 and GD.20 to 22
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient CAC Ceiling attenuation class
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1530.3 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures -
Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release
AS 1530.4 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures - Fire -resistance test of elements of construction
AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface
requirements for physical compatibility ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms
sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method)
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are:
Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Requirements
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Rondo: Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems
Company: Forman Building Systems Ltd Web: www.forman.co.nz/products.php Telephone: 0800 45 4000
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Allow to erect a sample section of the suspended ceiling system offered. Subject to confirmation in writing, the sample section may form part of the completed installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location of sample section.
1.6 SAMPLE SECTION
1.7 INSTALLATION
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 97
To AS/NZS 2785. Installation by a manufacturer's accredited installer, using the manufacturer's technical services. Provide evidence of experience, listing completed projects of similar size and complexity. Installation of Firefly Cavity Barriers must be by trained installers. Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1. Installation to comply with the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 5.9 Ducting, 5.14 Luminaires, and 5.13 Ceiling-suspended equipment and equipment in ceiling voids.
Supply information on the materials and method of cleaning the ceiling system over its expected life. 1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Provide spare matching ceiling elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS. Deliver into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times.
Performance
1.9 SPARES
Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 or NZS 1170.5. 1.10 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT
� certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation � certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of performance
specified � a Producer Statement on completion.
1.11 CERTIFICATION
The Group Number Classification to NZBC C/AS2-C/AS6, table 4.1, has been determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, following testing to ISO 5660.1.
All other Forman ceiling tile products tested to AS/NZS 1530.3. Refer to SELECTIONS for tested products.
1.12 FORMAN PRODUCT FIRE GROUP NUMBERS
Product Group Number Armstrong, Eurocoustic and Parafon ceiling tile range 1 - S
Design the ceiling system for use over its expected life without deterioration. Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.14 REFLECTANCE
Materials - Rondo Key-Lock suspended flush ceilings
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM
System: Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system Supplied by Forman Building Systems Freephone: 0800 45 4000.
GIB® plasterboard to AS/NZS 2588. 2.2 PLASTERBOARD SHEET
Components
2.3 PERFORATED CORRUGATED STEEL SHEETING
Join furring channels and C channels using pop rivets or 8g-16 x 12mm (minimum) self drilling wafer head screws.
2.4 FASTENERS SUSPENSION SYSTEM
25mm x 6 gauge non-rusting Type S self-drilling and self-tapping buglehead screws. 2.5 SCREWS
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
3.1 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 98
Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between suspension members and luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of extra hangers and fixings. Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific ceiling tiles below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.
Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight, and mechanical and electrical duct work above the ceiling completed.
3.2 SITE CONDITIONS
Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.3 COMPLY
Ensure that conditions are suitable for the ceiling installation. Arrange for the programming of the work to suit required practice.
Application
3.4 RESPONSIBILITY
Install the system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards and the ceiling manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 INSTALL
Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.
3.6 ACCESSIBILITY
Accommodate recessed light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or mechanical services that are fixed to or pass through the ceiling system. Provide independent support for these as necessary.
3.7 PENETRATIONS
Install the Forman Rondo Keylock suspension system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards. Screw-fix sheets to furring channel sections at the centres required by the ceiling lining manufacturer. Stagger joints and fully support on sections, with strongbacks at centres to suit the load and Rondo installation manual. Refer to 5113G GIB® PLASTERBOARD LININGS for plasterboard stopping specification.
3.8 CEILING LINING - FIXING
Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation.
Completion
3.9 PROTECT EXISTING WORK
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.10 REPLACE
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.11 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.12 REMOVE
Clean soiled or marked units. 3.13 CLEAN
For further details on selections go to www.forman.co.nz/products.php Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
Acoustic
Grid and tile system
4.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
NRC: 0.6 minimum
Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system from Forman Building Systems. 4.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Location: Main reception space Ceiling lining: Perforated corrugated steel sheet - 0.55mm BMT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5313F FORMAN CONCEALED SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS Page 99
5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY
This section relates to the supply and installation of custom joinery fittings and cabinetwork, purpose made in a factory and fitted on site, incorporating Laminex New Zealand® range of cabinetry panel products. It includes:
� Trade Essentials® Range - Plywood, Superfine®, Lakepine, Whiteboard, Hardboard, Tempered Hardboard, Cabinet Backing, Strandboard
� Melteca® and Melteca® Hi-Gloss Panels � Associated components and accessories necessary to complete the cabinetry installation.
The scope includes the main joinery unit in the reception area, the joinery unit behind the reception counter, the joinery unit in the staff room, one in each non-accessible w.c. and one in the shower room.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops for associated proprietary bench tops Refer to 7151 Sanitary fixtures, tapware and accessories
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORKS
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC C/VM2 Protection from fire AS/NZS 1859.1 Reconstituted wood based panels - Specifications - Particleboard
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Trade Essentials® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets Melteca® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Formica® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Laminex® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guide Melteca®, Formica®, Laminex® and Trade Essentials® Fire Test Reports Manufacturer/supplier contact details
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Company: Laminex New Zealand, a division of Fletcher Building Ltd Web: www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 303 606
Provide a Laminex New Zealand material warranty:
Refer to Laminex New Zealand for warranty details and conditions.
� Provide this warranty on Laminex New Zealand standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
7 years For Melteca® and Melteca® Purecoat® panel products Limited Warranty 7 years For Formica® Laminates Limited Warranty 7 years For Laminex® Laminates Limited Warranty
Provide an installer warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the installer standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
2 years For installation
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 100
Requirements
Installers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified. If requested provide evidence of qualification / experience prior to commencing work.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Laminex New Zealand components and associated products listed in this section.
1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for details of how samples will be reviewed. Provide the following samples for review by the Contract Administrator: ~
1.8 SAMPLES
Provide maintenance materials listed in SELECTIONS to the Principal for ongoing maintenance requirements.
Performance
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Laminex New Zealand cabinetry materials tested to ISO 5660.1 and which achieve a Group Number Classification of 3 to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, table 4.1, as determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, are as follows:
� Melteca® and Melteca® Hi-Gloss Panels
1.10 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES
Materials - plywood
2 PRODUCTS
Trade Essentials® B/B Lite Poplar Plywood, supplied in size 2400mm x 1200mm x 18mm thick. Lightweight and suitable for CNC panels, as a substrate for laminating with HPL and for lightweight cabinetry. Refer to SELECTIONS.
Materials - particleboard
2.1 TRADE ESSENTIALS PLYWOOD - BB LITE
Trade Essentials® Superfine®, a medium density, grain less, resin bonded particleboard panel, used as substrate for laminates, vinyl overlays, low pressure melamine overlays, wood veneers and paint finishes. Manufactured to AS/NZS 1859.1, 18mm thick panel tested to ISO 5660.1. For dry interior use only. Supplied in various panel sizes and thicknesses. Refer to SELECTIONS.
Materials - MDF panels
2.2 TRADE ESSENTIALS SUPERFINE PARTICLEBOARD - SUBSTRATE IN MELTECA PANELS
Melteca® Quality Laminated Panels comprised of a Superfine® particleboard substrate with a double-faced melamine surface. Manufactured to AS/NZS 1859.3 and tested to ISO 5660.1. Available in a selection of sheet sizes and thicknesses in a variety of decors and finishes, each with matching edgetape. Fire retardant options also available. Refer to SELECTIONS.
Components
2.3 MELTECA QUALITY LAMINATED PANELS
Refer to 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS section. 2.4 BENCHTOPS
One-piece steel, straight deep-cut thread, fibre board screws with press fit plastic trim cap. 2.5 CARCASE CONNECTORS
Knock down type centric sphere zinc alloy connectors with connecting bolts, sleeves and dowels, to suit each particular fastening location.
2.6 CARCASE FASTENERS
Butt, broad butt, flush butt or overlay steel or brass, to suit the location, or as detailed. 2.7 BUTT HINGES
All-metal zinc alloy with automatic spring and screw-fixed. Door stops of plastic foam with self adhesive backs, or plastic buttons clear or coloured to match unit.
2.8 CONCEALED HINGES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 101
All-metal, flush-fitted and screw-fixed with no gap when the flap is down. 2.9 FLAP HINGES
Under mounted type, precision running ball-mounted full extension, bright steel finish system.
Accessories
2.10 DRAWER RUNNERS
As approved by the manufacturer for the cabinetry product or pre-finished cabinetry product joint being used. 2.11 ADHESIVES
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs). Take responsibility for the completed joinery fixtures including fittings included within fixtures and the on-site installation.
3.1 JOINERY FIXTURES GENERALLY
Site check and confirm dimensions after wall linings have been fixed. Verify positions of electric power outlets, wiring to light fittings included in joinery fixtures, water supplies and waste pipe locations.
3.2 SITE MEASURE
Arrange jointing and fixing so that shrinkage in any part and direction does not impair the strength or appearance of the finished work or damage the adjoining work.
3.3 SHRINKAGE
Provide reasonable tolerances at connections between the joinery fittings and the building fabric so that any irregularities are adequately compensated for in the site fixing.
3.4 TOLERANCES
Select and match all adjacent pieces. Clash exposed edges of panels with matching edge tapes and finishes.
Conditions - site
3.5 LAMINEX PANEL PRODUCTS
Load, transport and unload fittings without distortion or damage and keep covered to protect from the weather.
3.6 TRANSIT
Deliver fittings to the site only when floor, wall and ceiling surfaces are in place and the fittings can be immediately placed in their final location.
Assembly
3.7 DELIVERY
Carry out machining within the practices required for the particular Laminex New Zealand panel product being used. Machine drill holes, cut recesses and form joints ready for assembly to the componentry manufacturer's requirements. Ensure work is accurate, square and true to line.
3.8 MACHINING
Obtain fitting templates from the appliances and other fittings to be installed within cabinetry and bench tops. Ensure appliances and fittings can be installed with the required tolerances and clearances. Where bench tops are being provided under 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS, provide templates and confirm dimensions to others.
3.9 MAKE CUT OUTS FOR APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
Carry out gluing, dowelling, and other operations necessary for the proper assembly of the fittings as detailed with fixings concealed unless detailed otherwise. Scribe fit adjustable shelves with 4 shelf pins to each and with force fit pin holes at 50mm maximum centres in solid cheeks. Construct drawers and using groove mounting runners, fit them with 3mm clearance into drawer space. Hang doors on concealed hinges with 115 degree openings except where detailed for 170 degrees.
3.10 ASSEMBLY
3.11 GLUE JOINTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 102
Use glue joints where provision for shrinkage is not required. Cross-tongue or otherwise reinforce. Surfaces in contact to have an even sawn or planed finish and be free of contamination. Mix, apply and set to the glue manufacturer's requirements with adequate pressure applied to ensure intimate contact that will be maintained while the glue sets.
Locate and drive connectors to Laminex New Zealand requirements. Fit plastic trim cap where detailed. Conceal or hide from sight other connector heads.
3.12 CONNECTOR JOINTS
Locate and drive connecting bolts to Laminex New Zealand requirements. Form joint and fit and rotate centric sphere connector to finish it rigid and tightly fitting over the whole length of the joint.
Application
3.13 FASTENER JOINTS
� Scribe fit and conceal fix rigidly in place square, level, plumb and true to line and face as detailed and to the required standard.
� Assemble fittings on-site if brought in sections. � Fit counter and bench tops and upstands. � Complete with moveable parts in place and freely moving in their proper range.
3.14 FIXING ON SITE
Protect finished surfaces from damage, particularly bench tops.
Care & maintenance - cabinetry surfaces
3.15 PROTECT
Provide maintenance documentation in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Care & Maintenance Guides as necessary for the Principal to maintain the works. Provide documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the Principal takes occupation of the works.
Completion
3.16 CARE & MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.
3.17 ROUTINE CLEANING
Repair damaged or marked elements. Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.
3.18 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.19 REPLACE
Leave work complete, clean and without blemish and to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.21 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
Materials - MDF panels
4.1 CABINET BACKING
Location: Backing panels for each joinery unit Manufacturer: Fletcher Wood Panels Ltd Grade/brand: Panelwhite Thickness: 6mm Sheet size: 2440mm x 1220mm
4.2 MELTECA QUALITY LAMINATED PANELS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 103
Components
Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Grade/brand: Melteca® Quality Laminated Panels Thickness: 16mm, refer to Melteca® Availability Guide Panel size: various, refer to Melteca® Availability Guide Substrate: Superfine® Particleboard Finish: Satin Colours: To be selected Clashing: 2mm pvc edging strips
Refer to 511LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS section. 4.3 BENCHTOPS
4.4 CARCASE CONNECTORS
Manufacturer: Hafele Finish: Bright steel
4.5 CONCEALED HINGES
Manufacturer: Hafele Product name: Intermat
4.6 DRAWER RUNNERS
Manufacturer: Hettich International Product name: Quadro V6 Silent System
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5511LC LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND CABINETRY Page 104
5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS
This section relates to the supply and installation of prefabricated bench tops incorporating the Laminex New Zealand range of surface finishes and materials. It includes:
� Formica® HPL � Laminex® HPL
The scope includes benchtops for the reception counter in the reception area, the unit behind the reception counter, the kitchen unit in the staff room, the vanity tops in the w.c's and the vanity top in the shower room
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry for associated cabinetry work Refer to 7151 Sanitary fixtures, tapware and accessories
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC C/VM2 Protection from fire AS/NZS 2924.1 High pressure decorative laminates - Sheets made from thermosetting
resins - Classification and specifications EN 438.4 High-pressure decorative laminates (hpl) - sheets based on thermosetting
resins (usually called laminates) - part 4: Classification and specifications for compact laminates of thickness 2mm and greater
ISO 5660.1 Reaction to Fire Tests - Heat Release Smoke Production and Mass Loss Rate Part 1: Heat Release Rate (Cone Calorimeter Method)
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Formica® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets, Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guides Laminex® Brochures, Technical Data Sheets. Material Safety Data Sheets and Care & Maintenance Guides Manufacturer/supplier contact details
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Laminex New Zealand Ltd, a division of Fletcher Building Ltd Web: www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 303 606
Provide a Laminex New Zealand material warranty:
Refer to Laminex New Zealand for warranty details and conditions.
� Provide material warranty in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Ltd requirements � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
7 years For Formica® Laminates Limited Warranty 7 years For Laminex® Laminates
Provide an installer warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the installer standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
2 years For installation
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 105
Requirements
Fabricator/Installer to be experienced in the installation of Formica®, Laminex® or Caesarstone® bench tops. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Laminex New Zealand components and associated products listed in this section.
1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Provide maintenance documentation in accordance with Laminex New Zealand Care & Maintenance Guides as necessary for the Principal to maintain the works. Provide documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the Principal takes occupation of the works.
Performance
1.8 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Laminex New Zealand bench top materials tested to ISO 5660.1 and achieve a Group Number Classification of 3 to NZBC C/AS2-AS6, table 4.1, as determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A. Materials are as follows:
� Formica® HPL on Lakepine MDF � Laminex® HPL on Lakepine MDF
1.9 SURFACE FIRE PROPERTIES
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Formica® HPL, a durable, post formable high pressure decorative laminate 0.7mm thick bonded to Lakepine MDF substrate. Manufactured to AS/NZS 2924.1 and tested to ISO 5660.1. Internal or external curves formed to a minimum radius of 10mm for solid colours and 6mm for patterns and wood grains in the machine direction. Supplied in a range of sheet sizes, finishes and colours. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.
2.1 FORMICA HPL BENCHTOP
Laminex® HPL, a durable post formable laminate 0.7mm thick bonded to Lakepine MDF substrate. Manufactured to AS/NZS 2924.1 and tested to ISO 5660.1. Internal or external curves formed to a minimum radius of 10mm for solid colours and 6mm for stones, abstract patterns and wood grains in the machine direction. Supplied in a range of sheet size and colours. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.
2.2 LAMINEX HPL BENCHTOP
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Keep products dry in transit. Take delivery of products dry and undamaged. Deliver all materials in original unopened packaging with labels intact.
3.1 DELIVERY
Store bench tops in a dry and securely locked area. Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed. Sign off each package from the schedule as released.
Pre-Installation
3.2 STORAGE
Ensure all room/areas are completely decorated. 3.3 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Site check and confirm dimensions after wall linings have been fixed. Verify positions of electric power outlets, wiring to light fittings included in joinery fixtures, water supplies and waste pipe locations.
3.4 SITE MEASURE
Ensure substrate and fixings will allow work of the specified standard. Ensure finishes are complete. 3.5 SUBSTRATE
Confirm fixing points needed for each bench top and confirm that the appropriate continuous support frame /cabinetry, nogging or lining at each fixing point location are provided.
3.6 SUPPORT
Do not proceed if support frame /cabinetry or services do not match the requirements of the bench top. 3.7 CO-ORDINATION
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 106
Check all components are included. Assemble to Laminex New Zealand instructions and to achieve finished bench top.
Installation
3.8 ASSEMBLY
Locate bench top at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings. Before proceeding, confirm any dimension not shown or known.
3.9 LOCATE
Carry out machining within the practices required for the bench top. Machine drill and cut holes and recesses and form joints to the componentry manufacturer's requirements. Ensure work is accurate, square and true to line and face.
3.10 FABRICATION QUALITY
Obtain fitting templates from the appliances and other fittings to be installed within the bench top. Ensure appliances and fittings can be installed with the required tolerances and clearances.
3.11 MAKE CUT OUTS FOR APPLIANCES AND FITTINGS
Install each bench top in accordance with Laminex New Zealand requirements using templates and tools supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. Set bench tops level, plumb and true to line and required location.
Completion
3.12 INSTALL
Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.
3.13 ROUTINE CLEANING
Repair damaged or marked elements. Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.
3.14 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK
Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following work.
3.15 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.16 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Materials
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 FORMICA HPL BENCHTOP
Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Brand/type: Formica® HPL Sheet size: Maximum sheet size depending on unit Sheet thickness: 0.7mm Benchtop size: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Benchtop profile: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Solid colour: To be selected Finish: To be selected
4.2 LAMINEX HPL BENCHTOP
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 107
Location: All joinery units Supplier: Laminex New Zealand Brand/type: Laminex® HPL Sheet size: Maximum sheet size depending on unit Sheet thickness: 0.7mm Benchtop size: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Benchtop profile: Refer to drawing 1535 GD.50 Solid colour: To be selected Finish: To be selected
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 5517LB LAMINEX NEW ZEALAND BENCHTOPS Page 108
6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING
This section relates to the supply and installation of Jacobsen vinyl surfacing complete with skirtings, nosings, trims and edgings and including static control sheet to floors. It includes:
� PVC sheet The scope includes anti-static vinyl in the New IT room, floor vinyl in the w.c's, slip resistant vinyl in the shower room, and a vinyl area around the sink unit in the staff room. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.14 for areas required and drawing 1535 GD.50 for base upstands.
Related work
1 GENERAL
Refer to 5511LC Laminex New Zealand Cabinetry for base upstands
Documents
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS2-AS7 Protection from fire NZS/AS 1884 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Installation practices AS/NZS 3661.1 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements IEC 61340.4.1 Electrostatics - Part 4.1: Standard test methods for specific applications -
Electrical resistance of floor coverings and installed floors EN 1081 Resilient Floor Coverings - Determination of the Electrical Resistance BRANZ BU 330 Thin flooring materials - 2 Preparation and laying
Manufacturer's and Jacobsen Ltd documents relating to this part of the work: Jacobsen Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Jacobsen Web: www.jacobsens.co.nz Telephone: 0-9-574 0640 Auckland 0-4-495 4300 Wellington 0-3-366 4153 Christchurch
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
5 years: Materials
Provide an installer/applicator warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
1 year: Execution
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products. 1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 109
Layers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
Submit on request samples of sheet, tile and accessories offered sufficient to show the pattern and the range of colour finish.
Performance
1.8 SAMPLES
Slip resistance for vinyl to comply with NZBC acceptable solution D1/AS1, clause 2.0, Level access routes and clause 3.0, Ramps.
� Sheet and tiles when in place on a level access route to have a mean coefficient of friction (µ) not less than 0.4 when tested wet in accordance with AS/NZS 3661.1.
� Sheet and tiles when in place on a sloping access route to have a coefficient of friction (µ) not less than µ = 0.4 + 0.0125S, where S is the slope of the walking surface expressed as a percentage.
Provide evidence that the vinyl complies with the standard of performance specified.
1.9 SLIP RESISTANCE
Provide certificates and any other evidence at the time of selection/supply that the vinyl complies with NZBC verification method D1/VM1 and acceptable solution D1/AS1.
1.10 CERTIFY SLIP RESISTANCE
Test static control flooring to IEC 61340.4.1 or EN 1081 and provide a certificate of compliance. 1.11 TEST STATIC CONTROL
Flooring to meet the fire performance requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.3, by: Either, Flooring is tested and achieved the minimum Critical Radiant Flux requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.2. Provide certificates or other evidence that the flooring will comply. or, Critical Radiant Flux not required if area of non-conforming products have an aggregate surface area of not greater than 5m² within a firecell, to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.a.
1.12 SURFACE FIRE PERFORMANCE
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Tarkett, with factory applied PUR (polyurethane) to ensure a low maintenance system requiring no sealers or polish.
2.1 VINYL SHEET
Form coving using either pencil cove or fillet cove method. 2.2 COVINGS
High vinyl content monolayer flexible PVC sheet static control flooring to IEC 61340.4.1 or EN 1081 complete with 12mm x 0.1mm copper foil strip.
2.3 VINYL SHEET, STATIC CONTROL
Cove based skirting. Refer to SELECTIONS for height and colour. 2.4 VINYL SKIRTING
Jacobsen Tredsafe's aluminium finishing trims and transition bars. 2.5 FINISHING TRIM & TRANSITION BARS
Jacobsen PVC top cap to top of coved vinyl.
Accessories
2.6 COVE CAPPING
UZIN KE2000S or Jacobsen ProBond acrylic floor and wall adhesive. 2.7 ADHESIVE
To the adhesive manufacturer's requirements for the particular substrate. 2.8 PRIMER AND SEALER
Roberts floor levelling compound. 2.9 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 110
Manufacturer supplied colour matched weld rod using the Tarkett weld nozzle. 2.10 THERMOWELDING
Chemical weld heterogeneous vinyl to manufacturer's instructions. Obtain a copy of instructions and follow specified procedures.
2.11 CHEMICAL WELDING
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
To manufacturer's requirements and NZS/AS 1884. 3.1 GENERALLY
Accept rolls of sheet, packages of tiles and accessories undamaged and dry. Store rolls upright with other material on level surfaces in non-traffic, non-work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.
3.2 STORAGE
Avoid distortion, stretching, marking and damage to edges while shifting unrolling and handling sheet, tiles and accessories. Do not use damaged material.
3.3 HANDLING
Check that each colour supplied is from the same batch. Follow the vinyl manufacturer's requirements for preparatory conditioning of rolls and working temperatures and conditions before, during and after laying the selected vinyl. Protect work from solar heat gain and switch off under-floor heating during and for 48 hours either side of the work period.
3.4 PREPARATION
Do not start work before the building is enclosed, wet work is complete, doors are hung and lockable, finishes and trim complete and good lighting is available.
3.5 DO NOT START
Inspect the substrate to ensure it is a suitable finish 3.6 INSPECT
Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the vinyl installation. 3.7 PROTECTION
Carry out the whole of this work to NZS/AS 1884, BRANZ BU 330 and the flooring manufacturer's requirements.
3.8 LAYING GENERALLY
Before beginning the installation confirm the proposed layout of material, location of seams and other visual considerations of the finished work.
Application - substrate preparation
3.9 TECHNIQUE
Clear substrate of debris, clean off surface contamination and carry out surface repairs using Roberts levelling compound. Carefully feather out at perimeters of repaired areas. Grind level, then vacuum to remove dust. Check moisture content to NZS/AS 1884, Appendix A and do not commence laying vinyl until readings for the whole area show 75% relative humidity or less.
3.10 PREPARING NEW CONCRETE
Prime and/or seal porous plaster, concrete and timber substrates to the adhesive manufacturer's requirements.
Application - laying floors
3.11 APPLYING PRIMER OR SEALER FOR VINYL SHEET
Apply UZIN KE2000S at the required spread rate, without leaving trowel marks after setting. Follow requirements for open time, taking note of the substrate porosity, ambient temperature and relative humidity. Remove excess adhesive as the work proceeds using required techniques.
3.12 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVE
Roll out, cut, leave to condition and install sheet vinyl to Tarkett's recommended installation procedure, ensuring there are no air bubbles or twisting, the seams are kept clear of adhesive and immediately the sheet is adhered it is rolled with a 68 kg roller.
3.13 LAYING FLOOR SHEET
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 111
Machine groove and thermoweld seams in designated areas, using the Tarkett weld nozzle, heating the sheet and weld rod to a sufficient temperature to melt and fuse them together in a single mass. Trim the weld to leave a smooth, flush surface with the sheet.
3.14 THERMOWELDING
Plan and allow cuts to avoid cross joins. Obtain written approval before proceeding if cross joins are unavoidable. Cross joins are not acceptable in wet areas.
3.15 CROSS JOINS
Pencil cove flooring to the specified height and finish off as detailed. 3.16 COVING VINYL
Perform butterfly method to internal and external mitres, allowing to thermoweld mitres. 3.17 COMPLETE MITRES
Lay out and adhere to the substrate to Tarkett's required installation procedures. Roll out, cut, leave to condition and install static control sheet with approved adhesive, ensuring there are no air bubbles or twisting and the seams are kept clear of adhesives. Immediately the sheet is adhered, roll with a 68 kg roller. Tarkett Granit SD should give average resistance readings of 1 x 106 to 1 x 108 ohms.
3.18 LAYING STATIC CONTROL SHEET
Hand groove and thermo-weld seams, heating the sheet and weld rod using Tarkett Speed Tip Nozzle to a sufficient temperature to melt and fuse them together in a single mass. Trim the weld to leave a smooth, flush surface with the sheet.
Application - general
3.19 THERMOWELDING WALL VINYL
Fit skirtings in accordance with Tarkett's required installation procedures. 3.20 FIT VINYL SKIRTINGS
Scribe fit, adhere or otherwise fix true to line and face to the sheet manufacturer's requirements for each particular location.
Completion
3.21 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.22 REPLACE
Obtain a copy of the Tarkett cleaning instructions and carry out initial clean to those instructions. 3.23 CLEAN COMMERCIAL VINYL FLOORING
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.24 REMOVE
Protect completed work from damage for the period between completion of laying and completion of the contract works, or until acceptance/sign-off by ~.
3.25 PROTECT
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.26 LEAVE
For further details on selections go to www.jacobsens.co.nz. Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 VINYL SHEET - W.C.'S
Product: Tarkett Optima Colour/number: To be advised Thickness: 2mm Seam welding: Thermowelded
4.2 VINYL SHEET - SHOWER ROOM
Product: Tarkett Granit Multisafe Colour/number: To be advised Thickness: 2mm Seam welding: Thermowelded
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 112
4.3 COVINGS
Height: 100mm Type: Continuous
4.4 JACOBSEN ADHESIVE
Adhesive: UZIN KE2000S
4.5 VINYL SHEET, STATIC CONTROL
Type: Tarkett Granit SD Colour/number: To be selected Conductive strips: UZIN self adhesive conductive copper foil strip Adhesive: UZIN KE200S
4.6 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND
Type: Roberts floor levelling compound
4.7 FINISHING TRIM & TRANSITION BARS
Location: Where shown on drawing 1535 GA.14 Brand: Tredsafe Profile number: DT 030 Profile colour: Champagne
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 113
6512 CARPET TILES
This section relates to the supply and installation of carpet tiles. It includes:
� nylon � wool fibre � polymer-backed
Documents
1 GENERAL
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.1 DOCUMENTS
NZBC C/AS2-AS7 Protection from fire AS/NZS 2455.1 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - General AS/NZS 2455.2 Textile floor coverings - installation practice - Carpet tiles
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Tandus Flooring Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.2 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Floorspace Ltd Web: www.floorspace.co.nz Email: 021 880 303 Telephone: 04 934 3267
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.3 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
1 year: For manufacture
Provide an installer/applicator warranty:
� Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
1.4 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
1 year: For installation
Provide full size sample tiles for each type and pattern, for approval of colour, design and quality. 1.5 SAMPLES
Carpet tile layers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Concrete slab is be cured and dried to a relative humidity of not exceeding 75% or until the moisture content does not exceed 5.5%, in accordance with AS/NZS 2455.1, refer to section 6192 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION.
1.7 MOISTURE CONTENT OF CONCRETE SLAB
Supply reserve carpet tiles, suitably packaged for delivery and storage. Refer to SELECTIONS. 1.8 RESERVE MATERIAL
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 114
Performance
Flooring to meet the fire performance requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.3, by: Either, Flooring is tested and achieved the minimum Critical Radiant Flux requirements of NZBC C/AS2-AS6, Table 4.2. Provide certificates or other evidence that the flooring will comply. or, Critical Radiant Flux not required if area of non-conforming products have an aggregate surface area of not greater than 5m² within a firecell, to NZBC C/AS2-AS7, 4.17.6.a.
1.9 SURFACE FIRE PERFORMANCE
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Nylon/wool fibre fusion-bonded to a polymer, PVC or bitumen backing. 2.1 CARPET TILES
A pressure release adhesive. Refer to SELECTIONS for brand. 2.2 ADHESIVE
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Before starting work inspect the substrate to ensure that it will allow work of the required standard and that fittings and fixtures, around which the carpet is to be scribed, are in place.
3.1 INSPECTION
Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the carpet installation. 3.2 PROTECTION
Plan the general layout to: � to conform with any special pattern requirements as detailed � to maximise perimeter and cut module sizes and � subject to any specific design instructions, to ensure that tiles are laid parallel to the longest wall.
3.3 LAYOUT
3.4 TEMPERATURE
Floor temperature: Minimum 16°C. Concrete pH: No more than 10.0. Carpet tiles: Conditioned at 16°C for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation.
Keep carpet tiles dry. Protect from damage.
Application - substrate preparation
3.5 HANDLE AND STORE
To be level, smooth, clean, cured and dry. Remove loose material and dust. Refer to 6192 FLOORING SUBSTRATE PREPARATION.
Application - carpet tile laying
3.6 PREPARING NEW CONCRETE FLOOR
Lay in accordance with AS/NZS 2455.1, AS/NZS 2455.2 and the carpet tile manufacturer's own installation instructions.
3.7 LAYING GENERALLY
Confirm mono or quarter turn following selection 3.8 LAYING DIRECTION
Cut tiles from the back, using the carpet tile manufacturer's required cutting technique.
Completion
3.9 CUTTING OF TILES
Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site.
3.10 ROUTINE CLEANING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 115
Repair damaged or marked elements. Replace damaged or marked elements where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.
3.11 DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK
Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Materials
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 CARPET TILES
Location: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.14 Brand: Tandus C & A Type: To be confirmed Pattern/colour: ~ Face yarn: ~ Backing: ~ Pile weight: ~ g/m²
4.2 ADHESIVE
Brand: Giltedge Giltgrip 66 (Pressure sensitive, low in VOC adhesive) Type: Pressure release adhesive
4.3 RESERVE MATERIAL
Tile type Quantity As selected 2 boxes
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6512 CARPET TILES Page 116
6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL
This section relates to the general matters related to Resene painting work.
1 GENERAL
Refer to 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section: Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992
1.3 DOCUMENTS
MPNZA Specification manual
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are:
Copies of the above literature are available from Resene
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual (hard copy or at www.resene.co.nz) Resene Putting your safety first
Telephone: 0800 RESENE (0800 737 363)
Warrant this work under normal conditions of use against failure referring to the Resene Promise of Quality in the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.
Requirements This painting specification is written based on information available at the time of writing.
1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Resene coating system, or associated components and products. Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system. If in the applicator's own expertise and judgement an amendment to this specification is required, or where a substrate preparation, or required painting system is not covered in this specification, this shall be brought to the attention of the contract administrator and any amendment agreed before work proceeds any further.
1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Painters to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified and with the Resene coating systems and be members of the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. The applicator is to have the necessary skill, experience and equipment to undertake the work. The applicator remains responsible for ensuring proper completion of the work. Painters to be selected from the Resene Eco.Decorator programme. The Resene Eco.Decorator programme is designed to recognise a nationwide network of environmentally responsible, quality focussed painting contractors. Refer to www.resene.co.nz/ecodecorator.htm for a list of Eco.Decorators in your area.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
1.8 CONTROL SAMPLES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 117
Prepare samples of the finished work, including the specified preparation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type. Obtain approval in writing of the appearance before proceeding. Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.
Control reference: Check colours to Resene colour samples prior to application and keep the Resene colour samples on site as a control reference. Colour matches are not permitted as they will differ in appearance, durability and performance to the original selected colour over the life of the coating. Samples of Resene colours may be ordered online from https://secure.clearfield.com/resene/SelectChart.asp?productType=3 or by calling 0800 RESENE (737 363). Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.
1.9 COLOUR SAMPLES
Before any work commences painters should verify, with Architects or specifying authority, that their paint matches a previously supplied standard card or panel. Differently coloured paints will vary in price, opacity and durability. Resene normally only specify two coats of colour but with certain colours, such as yellows and oranges, three coats may be needed. Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.
1.10 PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCING
Refer to the general section 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE for provision of the following general operation and maintenance information as electronic PDF format documents: Maintenance guide for Resene paint finishes www.resene.co.nz/comn/services/maintenance.htm. Provide this information prior to practical completion.
1.11 INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Prepare samples of the finished work including the specified preparation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type. Make arrangements for the supervision of the relevant stages. Obtain written approval before proceeding. Supervised control samples may, after written approval, be used for comparative testing of dry film thicknesses of the complete coating systems.
1.12 SUPERVISED CONTROL SAMPLES
Refer to and comply with the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 including the obligation to:
� Eliminate hazards and if hazards cannot be eliminated or isolated, then minimise the hazards in this work by using the proper equipment and techniques as required by the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook and Resene Putting your safety first handbook.
� Supply protective clothing and equipment. � Inform the contractor as well as the employees and others on site of those hazards and put in place
procedures for dealing with emergencies.
1.13 HEALTH AND SAFETY
Obtain from Resene (phone 0800 RESENE, or www.resene.co.nz) the safety data sheet for each product used and comply with the required safety procedures. Keep sheets on site.
Performance
1.14 SAFETY DATA SHEETS
Permit representatives of Resene to inspect the work in progress and to take samples of their products from site if requested. Resene will take care when inspecting the work, but does not accept any responsibility for the proper completion of the work before or after such inspection.
1.15 RESENE INSPECTION
Inspection of the whole of the work at each of the stages set out in SELECTIONS may be made. Agree on a programme that will facilitate such inspection, including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection.
1.16 INSPECTION OF THE WORK
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system. Use only Resene products (which are guaranteed for consistency and performance under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and APAS) prepared, mixed and applied as directed in the Resene One-Line Specifications and Product Data Manual. This specification has been written using where practical and available both low/no VOC and Environmental Choice approved products.
2.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 118
Darker colours in areas of high sun exposure place significant stress on the coating and substrate. Resene 'CoolColour' technology reduces heat absorption of a wide range of colours. Contact your local Resene Representative or visit www.resene.co.nz for more information or visit www.resene.co.nz/coolcolour. View a list of Resene colours that can be made using Resene CoolColour technology at www.resene.co.nz/colourlibrary.
2.2 EXPOSED DARK COLOURS
Use only if and when expressly directed by Resene for their particular product in a particular application. Always wear gloves when handling any solvents including turpentine as harmful chemicals may be absorbed into the body through the skin.
Accessories
2.3 THINNERS/ADDITIVES
Contact your local Resene ColorShop for a full range of accessories and usage advice. 2.4 ACCESSORIES
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
To conform to required trade practice, which shall be deemed to include those methods, practices and techniques contained in the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Specification manual.
3.1 EXECUTION
Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, check with the treatment manufacturer that coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance. If they are not compatible, obtain instructions before proceeding.
3.2 TREATED SURFACES
The descriptions of areas in schedules and elsewhere are of necessity simplified. Coat ancillary exposed surfaces to match similar or adjacent materials or areas, except where a fair-faced natural finish is required or items are completely prefinished. In cases of doubt obtain written instructions before proceeding.
3.3 ANCILLARY SURFACES
Do not paint hinges or hardware that cannot be removed. Before commencing work carefully remove hardware, fixtures and fittings, set aside where they cannot be damaged or misplaced and replace on completion. Refer to SELECTIONS for hardware, fixtures and fittings for removal.
3.4 HARDWARE
Supply, lay and fix dropsheets, coverings and masking necessary to protect adjoining, fixtures, fittings and spaces from paint drops, spots, spray and damage.
Application - preparatory work
3.5 PROTECTION
Refer to the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual for surface preparation sheets (or obtain them by phoning 0800 RESENE, or at www.resene.co.nz) listed in the materials systems schedule clauses. Carry out the preparatory work required by them for each of the substrates.
3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION
Handle cautiously lead-based paint and asbestos, if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual and the Putting your safety first brochure.
3.7 LEAD-BASED PAINT, ASBESTOS
Remove and/or repair sharp edges, cracks and holes if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual. Elastomeric sealants, if used, should not be painted. The paint film will not match the flexibility of the sealant and may severely limit its effectiveness.
3.8 SHARP EDGES, CRACKS AND HOLES
If any substrate or surface, that even with the preparation work called for in this section, cannot be brought up to a standard that will allow painting or clear finishing of the required standard then do not proceed until remedial work is carried out.
3.9 REMEDIAL WORK
3.10 GAP FILLING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 119
Make good cracks, holes, indented and damaged surfaces. Use suitable gap fillers to match the surface being prepared. Any special priming requirements of the fillers must be satisfied. Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface. Prime or seal timber before using putty. Exterior and wet areas: Use only Portland cement base or water-insoluble organic base gap fillers.
Carry out this work under cover in a suitable environment with suitable lighting. Store items, both before and after coating, in a clean, dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked and spaced to allow air circulation and to prevent sticking.
3.11 OFF-SITE WORK
Pre-treat any cut surfaces of preservative treated timber before priming. Ensure L.O.S.P. treated joinery has dried sufficiently to lose solvent odour. Pre-treat bare timber with Resene TimberLock (see Data Sheet D48) to improve the durability of subsequent coats. Liberally coat end grain, allow to soak in and then recoat.
3.12 PRIMING JOINERY
Where off-site coatings are specified they must be applied to surfaces including those concealed when incorporated into the building.
3.13 CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES
Apply primer to suit the coating system to surfaces which will be concealed when incorporated into the building.
3.14 CONCEALED METAL SURFACES
Prime or seal and paint bottom edges before hanging. 3.15 EXTERNAL DOORS
Stained, varnished, or painted joinery to have the first two coats, or the primer and one undercoat, applied to rebates and beads before glazing.
3.16 BEAD GLAZING
According to the putty manufacturer's instructions allow putty to set, then prime with Resene Wood Primer (see Data Sheet D40). Fully protect the putty by completing the Resene coating system as soon as it is sufficiently firm.
Application - generally
3.17 PUTTY FRONTING
Comply with the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual data sheets and the additional requirements of this work section. Ensure large wall areas that require more than one container of paint per coat, have enough paint boxed (mixed) together to complete the final coat. This will not apply if a single factory batch of paint, rather than shop tinted paint, is applied.
3.18 PAINTING GENERALLY
Although generally supplied ready-mixed, thoroughly mix paints. Lift any settled pigment and ensure the paint is homogenous.
3.19 MIXING
Defer painting of exterior surfaces until weather conditions are favourable - warm dry days without frost or heavy dews. Avoid painting in direct sunlight any surfaces that absorb heat excessively. As far as possible apply paint in the temperature range 15°C to 25°C. If temperatures fall outside the range of 10°C and 35°C do not paint unless paints with the necessary temperature tolerance have been specified. Do not apply solvent borne paint if moisture is present on the surface.
3.20 ENVIRONMENT
Painting work to generally follow the following sequences: � Complete surface preparation before commencing painting. � Apply primers, sealers, stains, undercoats, paints and clear coatings in the sequences laid down by
Resene. � Allow the full drying time between coats laid down by Resene. � Do not expose primers, undercoats and intermediate coats beyond Resene's recommendations before
applying the next coat. � Finish broad areas before painting trim. � Ensure batch numbers of tins are matched for whole areas. � Internally, paint ceilings before walls and walls before joinery, trim and other items.
3.21 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 120
Select brush, roller, or pad and apply coatings to the requirements of Resene to obtain a smooth, even coating of the specified thickness, uniform gloss and colour.
3.22 APPLICATION
Lightly sand primers, sealers, undercoats and intermediate coats to remove dust pick-up, protruding fibres and coarse particles. Complete by removing dust immediately before applying the next coat.
3.23 LIGHTLY SAND
Correct defective work immediately and recoat as required, following precisely the Resene system being applied.
3.24 DEFECTIVE WORK
Each coat of paint and the completed paint system to have the following qualities and properties: � Uniform finish, colour, texture, sheen and hiding power and the proper number of coats applied. � No blemishes such as runs, sags, crinkling, fat edges, entrained paint skins, hairs, dust, bare or starved
patches, cracks, brush marks, ladder marks and blistering. � Proper covering of corners, crannies, thin edges, cracks, end grain and other difficult places of
application.
Completion
3.25 EACH COAT
Clean adjoining surfaces, glass and fittings of any paint contamination. Clean off glass indicators at the completion of the building works. Clean glass inside and out to a shining finish. Use the Resene Washwise on site 'paint equipment clean-up water' reclamation system to minimise the environmental impact of cleaning paint application tools.
3.26 CLEAN
Leave the whole of this work uniform in gloss and colour, of correct thickness, free from painting defects, clean and unmarked and to the standard required by following procedures.
3.27 LEAVE
Remove dropsheets, coverings and masking to leave surrounding surfaces and areas clean, tidy and undamaged. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.
3.28 REMOVE
Replace hardware without damage to it or the adjoining surface and leave hardware properly fitted and in working order.
3.29 REPLACE
Note: The use and disposal of paint and thinners represents a significant environmental hazard. Ensure all paint and thinners are disposed of in the following manner:
� When requested hand over part used paint containers to client for maintenance touch ups. � Recycle leftover paint at a Resene ColorShop as part of the Resene "Paintwise programme". Contact
your local Resene ColorShop for details or view information online at www.resene.co.nz/paintwise.htm. � Donate left over paint to local community groups. � Solvent based paints, paint thinners, turpentine, mineral spirits and solvents require special disposal
procedures. Do not pour down sewer or storm water drains, sinks or into the ground. If they cannot be recycled they must be disposed of in a refuse dump licensed to take toxic waste.
3.30 DISPOSAL OF PAINTS AND THINNERS
4 SELECTIONS
Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR and 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR for selections. 4.1 SELECTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL Page 121
6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR
This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and existing exterior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 - New Ext Elevations
1 GENERAL
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work. Refer to 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR for interior paint systems.
1.1 RELATED WORK
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 3.1 EXECUTION
Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
Paint system schedules
Resene exterior paint systems
4.1 INSPECTION OF WORK
Stage Resene One-Line Spec number/system Intermittent 1e 1.2 (EC), 2e 1.1 (EC), 25e 1.3/5 P (EC)
4.2 EXTERIOR CEMENTITIOUS SURFACES - HARDIES LINEA WEATHERBOARD AND TRIM, EXPOSED FOUNDATION WALLS
Description: Exterior cementitious surfaces, waterborne semi-gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 1e 1.2 (EC) Surface prep: D83 For thin plaster - Resene Limelock D809, waterborne cure/seal 1st coat: For sound cementitious surfaces - Resene Concrete Primer D405,
waterborne primer; or For powdery surfaces - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer Self priming - Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 2nd coat: Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 3rd coat: Resene Sonyx 101 D30, waterborne semi-gloss 4th coat: Resene Multishield+ D54a, waterborne glaze (optional)
4.3 EXTERIOR TIMBERS - TIMBER FASCIAS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR Page 122
Description: Exterior timbers, waterborne gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2e 1.1 (EC) Surface prep: D82; and Resene TimberLock D48 NEC, solventborne
preserver/conditioner 1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne
primer/undercoat; or For timber that stains - Resene Wood Primer D40NEC, solventborne
primer; or For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Hi-Glo D31, waterborne gloss 3rd coat: Resene Hi-Glo D31, waterborne gloss
4.4 EXTERIOR METALLIC FINISHES - STEEL VERANDA POSTS
Description: Exterior waterborne pearlescent System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 25e 1.3/5 P (EC) Surface prep: D83 1st coat: Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne primer/sealer 2nd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 3rd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 4th coat: Resene Pearl Shimmer D312, waterborne pearlescent 5th coat: Resene Multishield+ D54a, waterborne glaze (optional)
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR Page 123
6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR
This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and existing interior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems. Refer to drawings 1535 GA.12, 18, 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44
1 GENERAL
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work. Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR for exterior paint systems.
1.1 RELATED WORK
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 3.1 EXECUTION
Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
4 SELECTIONS
Paint system schedules
Resene interior paint systems
4.1 INSPECTION OF WORK
Stage Resene One-Line Spec number/system Intermittent 2i 1.2 (EC), 15i 1.4 ZS Level 4 (EC), 15i 1.5 L4 Ceiling (EC)
4.2 INTERIOR TIMBER - DOOR LEAVES, FRAMES AND TRIM
Description: Interior timber, waterborne semi-gloss System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2i 1.2 (EC) Surface prep: D82; and Resene TimberLock D48NEC, solventborne
preserver/conditioner 1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne
primer/undercoat; or For timber that stains - Resene Wood Primer D40NEC, solventborne
primer; or For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer; or For painting over varnish - Resene Waterborne Smooth Surface Sealer
D47a, waterborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel 3rd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel
4.3 INTERIOR PAPER FACED PLASTER/SOLID PLASTER/FIBROUS PLASTER - GIB BOARD PARTITIONS AND CEILINGS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Page 124
For Level 4 system - Resene One-Line Spec No. 15i 1.4 ZS L 4 (EC) Remove Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal from Surface prep and add 1st coat: Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer D403, waterborne sealer
For Level 4 system - Resene One-Line Spec No. 15i 1.5 L 4 Ceiling (EC) Remove Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal from Surface prep and add 1st coat: Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer D403, waterborne sealer
Description: Interior paperfaced plaster/solid plaster/fibrous plaster, waterborne low sheen
System: ReseneOne-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.4 ZS Level 4 (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,
waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal
D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Zylone Sheen or Resene Zylone Sheen VOC Free D302,
waterborne low sheen 3rd coat: Resene Zylone Sheen or Resene Zylone Sheen VOC Free D302,
waterborne low sheen
Description: Interior paperfaced plaster/solid plaster/fibrous plaster, waterborne flat- ceiling
System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.5 Level 4 Ceiling (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,
waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal
D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat 3rd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR Page 125
7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM
This section relates to the KemPex PEX Hot and Cold Water Piping Systems from MM Kembla NZ Ltd (hereafter referred to as KemPex), for domestic,commercial and industrial applications. It includes:
� piped cold water distribution from the supply position on site to designated points and appliances
� the installation of hot water heating appliances, piped hot water distribution to other appliances
� the installation of valves and other items to complete the system Refer to drawing 1535 GA.17 New Plumbing Plan
1 GENERAL
Refer to 3820 Carpentry Refer to 4710P Pink Batts & Pink Batts Silencer Insulation Refer to 7151 Sanitary fixtures, Tapware and Accessories
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section.
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC C/AS1-AS7 Protection from fire NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency AS/NZS 2492 Cross-linked polyethylene (PE-X) pipes for pressure applications AS/NZS 2537.2 Mechanical joining fittings for use with cross linked Polyethylene (PE-X) for
pressure applications - Plastics piping systems for hot and cold water installations - Cross linked Polyethylene (PE-X) - Fittings
AS/NZS 2845.1 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Materials, design and performance requirements
AS 2845.3 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Field testing and maintenance
AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - Water services AS/NZS 3500.4 Plumbing and drainage - Heated water services NZS 4305 Energy efficiency domestic type hot water systems NZS 4607 Installation of thermal storage electric water heaters: valve vented
Systems NZS 4617 Tempering (3-port mixing) valves SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25757 - KemPex Pipe SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25717 - KemPex Fittings
NZ Backflow Testing Standard:
NZ Backflow Testing Standard 2011, Field testing of backflow prevention devices and verification of air gaps
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: KemPex Slide™ (Sliding Sleeve) Product Catalogue KemPex Crimp™ (Copper Crimp) Product Catalogue Kembla - The Plumbers Handbook Kembla Brazing Manual Manufacturer/supplier contact details
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: MM Kembla NZ Ltd Web: www.kembla.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 274 0111 Facsimile: 09 274 0347
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 126
Warranties
Kembla warrants that the KemPex pipe and fitting systems are free from manufacturing defects, including materials and workmanship, and are suitable for use in potable hot and cold water systems (Black Pex), underfloor central heating (Pink Pex), recycled water (Lilac Pex) and rainwater (Green Pex) for a period of 25 years, with the following conditions:
� The KemPex product must be inspected by the installer on site before installation to determine that no damage has occurred whilst in transit, stored or during installation.
� The KemPex system has been installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's documents, copies of which are available from all KemPex distributors together with the practices and procedures contained in AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, AS/NZS 3500.4, AS/NZS 3500.5
Requirements
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Warranty period: 25 years From: Date of completion of system testing.
Substitutions are not permitted to any specified KemPex brand products, components or accessories 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Installers to be experience competent tradesmen, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Pipework layouts to be in accordance with the manufacturer's documents and with AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 and AS/NZS 3500.4, or NZBC G12/AS1.
1.7 PIPEWORK LAYOUTS
To achieve a durability of 50 years, the design and installation work covered by this part of the specification must comply with NZBC B2/AS1, table 1.
Performance
1.8 DURABILITY
Planning, installation and commissioning to comply with AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, AS/NZS 3500.4, AS/NZS 3500.5 and to KemPex technical information. Size the pipe branches and straight runs to deliver the acceptable flow rate at each outlet to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, table 3, acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures. Allow for the expected concurrent use of adjoining fixtures and size the piping layout to eliminate loss of pressure at any point by simultaneous draw off.
1.9 SYSTEM DESIGN
Testing method and compliance to AS/NZS 3500.1:2003, section 16. Supply potable water and the apparatus needed. Flush system of all foreign material, pressure test the water filled system (without air pockets) at 1500kPa for 30 minutes.
1.10 TESTING
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
To AS/NZS 2492, peroxide-cross-linked HD Polyethylene, designated as PE-Xa, complete with dezincification resistant (DZR) brass fittings and accessories brand matched to the pipe manufacturer's requirements with durability to NZBC B2/AS1, table 1 and NZBC G12/AS1, table1. KemPex hot and cold water pipes for potable water and heating, in residential and commercial applications have a maximum operation temperature of 95°C and the maximum operating pressure of 2000kPa for PN20 pipe. Hot water systems to operate with a tempering valve to limit the maximum operating pressure of 10 bars at 70°C for a period of 50 years for the PN20 PE-Xa system. KemPex piping classified as follows:
KemPex carries the SAI Global Watermark Certificate WMK 25757 for KemPex Pipe and WMK 25717 for KemPex Fittings.
2.1 PE-XA POLYETHYLENE PIPE
KemPex Black PE-Xa with an outer black PE layer for UV protection for hot and cold water services
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 127
KemPex DZR brass sliding sleeve and copper crimp fittings are made of forged brass to comply with AS/NZS 2537.2
2.2 FITTINGS
Brackets, clips, support channels and KemPex manual and battery tool complete with pipe expander available for system installation.
Materials - hot water heating appliances
2.3 FIXINGS AND TOOLS
To NZS 4305, ceramic-coated steel thermal storage cylinder, insulated and complete with required fittings. 2.4 ELECTRIC HOT WATER CYLINDER, MAINS PRESSURE
To NZS 4305, wall-mounted boiling water heater in pre-finished cabinet, complete with tap draw off.
Components
2.5 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - KITCHEN SINK, SHOWER PUSH THROUGH
To the requirements of the network utility operator. 2.6 WATER METER
Pressure reducing or limiting valve, filter, non-return valve, cold water expansion valve, pressure relief or temperature valve, pressure relief valve and isolating valves to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies.
2.7 VALVES
Provide backflow prevention devices to AS/NZS 2845 where it is possible for water or contaminants to backflow into the potable water supply. Refer to NZBC G12 AS/1, 3.4 Backflow protection, and NZBC G12 AS/1, table 2, Selection of Backflow Protection.
2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES
Tempering valve to NZS 4617 and to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies. 2.9 TEMPERING VALVE
Manufactured from copper or brass, with maximum of 9 outlets per hot water cylinder. Complete with tempering valve and valves to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies. Provides balanced hot water pressure at each outlet.
2.10 ECO-FLOW DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLD HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEM
Pre-formed black polyethylene complete with access opening and lid and overflow tray. 2.11 HEADER TANKS
Pre-formed closed cell polymer pipe sections complete with bends and fittings, with protective tape to the manufacturer's requirements and to NZBC H1/AS1 and to AS/NZS 3500.4.8 Energy efficiency.
2.12 PIPE INSULATION
Plasticised PVC tape system with primer, mastic fixing and outer coating. 2.13 PROTECTIVE TAPE
BRANZ appraised modified MS neutral cure sealant. 2.14 SEALANT
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Handle and store pipes, fittings and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site, under cover out of direct UV radiation, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Store fittings and tapware in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging, complete with all fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately with its space/fixture number to match.
3.1 HANDLE AND STORE
Review location and fit core holes and sleeves as needed throughout the structure in conjunction with the boxing, reinforcing and placing of concrete. Strip core holes and make good after installation of pipework.
3.2 CORE HOLES AND SLEEVES
Concealed pipework within the fabric of the building unless detailed otherwise. 3.3 CONCEALED
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 128
UV radiation (e.g. sunlight or some types of fluorescent lights) may damage the pipes. Pipes installed in areas where they could be exposed to UV radiation must be completely covered to protect them, e.g. by using a protective sleeve such as Kempex Conduit.
3.4 UV PROTECTION FOR INSTALLED PIPEWORK
Separate all metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber, concrete and other lime substances by space, taping, or separator strips.
3.5 CORROSION
Accommodate movement in pipes resulting from temperature change by the layout of the pipe runs, by expansion joints and by sleeving through penetrations using KemPex Conduit system. For long runs in the hot water service an offset bend or omega bend may be required. Refer to manufacturer's details.
3.6 THERMAL MOVEMENT
Flow rates to each outlet to be no less than those given in NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, table 3, Acceptable flow rates to sanitary fixtures. Pipe size as determined in table 4, Tempering valve and nominal pipe diameters or for Manifold Eco - Flow system IRC 2003.
Application - jointing
3.7 PIPE SIZE
Seal joints by sliding the brass sleeve over the joint with an axial press tool or by crimping the fittings to NZBC G12/AS1: Water supplies, depending on the fitting system selected. Refer to SELECTIONS for preferred jointing system.
3.8 JOINING PE-XA PIPE
When connecting to other pipe systems use a threaded connection to provide a clear separation between both systems.
Application - pipework installation
3.9 CONNECTION TO OTHER PIPE SYSTEMS
To AS/NZS 3500.1:2003. From connection point, run pipes complete with all fittings, supports and fixings and join in accordance with the manufacturer's documents. Pipework support spacing to be firmly fixed and buffered to eliminate noise and water hammer, complete with KemPex fittings and necessary valves. Conceal pipework and pressure test before the wall linings are fixed. Do not install PE-Xa cross linked polyethylene pipe for flow and return piping to any solar water heating system. Use the KEMBLA® Copper for all Solar and uncontrolled heat sources (e.g. wood fired heaters) and around hot water cylinders.
3.10 POTABLE WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
To AS/NZS 3500.4. Use a take-off spigot to give separate branches to each fitting, lay out pipes with support spacing to NZBC G12/AS1, table 7 Water supply pipework support spacing. Pipework support spacing to be firmly fixed and buffered to eliminate noise and water hammer, complete with KemPex fittings and necessary valves. Lag all pipes with rigid or flexible pipe insulation to the manufacturer's requirements and NZBC G12/AS1.
3.11 HOT WATER PIPEWORK
Earth metallic water supply pipe and metallic sanitary fixtures to NZBC G12/AS1, 9.0.
Application - hot water systems
3.12 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
Install hot water cylinders complete to the manufacturer's requirements and to NZBC G12/AS1, 6.11, Water heater installation. Valve-vented systems to NZS 4607. Install Kembla Copper around the hot water cylinder to a minimum of 1 metre prior to the installation of the KemPex piping system.
3.13 HOT WATER CYLINDER INSTALLATION GENERALLY
For non-gas appliances NZBC G12/AS1 provides restraint options, one option for storage cylinders of up to 360 litres, is NZBC G12/AS1, figure 14, which is an easily understood solution.
3.14 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS - NON-GAS WATER HEATING APPLIANCES
Install to the cylinder manufacturer's stated requirements. Locate where shown. 3.15 INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED BOILING CYLINDER
Install one metre minimum from outlet of hot water cylinder and to manufacturer's instructions.
Installation - tapware
3.16 INSTALL TEMPERING VALVE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 129
Install isolating valves for appliances in accessible positions. Locate in adjacent cupboards and position to allow for easy connection and operation.
3.17 INSTALLING APPLIANCE ISOLATING VALVES - CONCEALED
Provide and install backflow prevention device as near as practicable to the potential source of contamination, and in an accessible position for maintenance and testing to AS 2845.3 or NZ Backflow Testing Standard.
3.18 INSTALLING BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE
Install tapware supplied under 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
Completion
3.19 INSTALLING TAPWARE
Label all pipework with permanent adhesive markers at 3 metre minimum intervals. 3.20 LABEL
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.21 REPLACE
Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.22 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and building elements from the site. 3.23 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.kembla.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
Water main
4 SELECTIONS
Pipework
4.1 POLYETHYLENE WATER MAIN
Size: 25mm outside diameter
4.2 KEMPEX PE-XA CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE PLUMBING WATER SYSTEM
Brand: KemPex - Black Pipe sizes: Refer to drawing 1535 GA.17 - 20mm an 15mm
4.3 KEMPEX JOINING SYSTEM
Type: KemPex Crimp™ fitting
Hot water systems
4.4 PIPEWORK RIGID INSULATION
Brand: Bradford Gold Material: Closed cell polymer Wall thickness: 13mm
4.5 ELECTRIC HOT WATER CYLINDER, MAINS PRESSURE
Brand: Rheem Model size: 90 Litre
4.6 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - STAFF KITCHEN
Brand: Rheem Laser Designer Series Model size: 5.0 litre
Valves and accessories
4.7 ELECTRIC BOILING CYLINDER, WALL MOUNTED - PUDH THROUGH SYSTEM IN SHOWER ROOM
Brand: Supplied by Parex Industires Ltd Model size: Triton T80Z Fast-Fit Electric Shower
4.8 FLOOR/ZONE ISOLATING VALVES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 130
Location: To be agreed on site Brand/type: Zurn
4.9 APPLIANCE ISOLATING VALVES - CONCEALED
Appliance: To be agreed on site Brand/type: Zurn
4.10 TEMPERING VALVE
Location: Within 1 metre of the outlet from the hot water cylinder Brand/type: Zurn
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7123KP KEMPEX HOT & COLD WATER SYSTEM Page 131
7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES
This section relates to the supply and installation of sanitary fixtures, tapware and sanitary accessories. Refer to drawings 1535 GA.11 (Foundation/Drainage Plan), 12, 13 and 17 (New Plumbing Plan)
1 GENERAL
Refer to 5517LB Laminex New Zealand Benchtops Refer to 7123KP KemPex Hot and Cold Water System Refer to 7420 Sanitary Systems - for the supply and fitting of waste disposal pipework Refer to 7701 Electrical Basic for electrical connection of accessories
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006 Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC E3/AS1 Internal moisture NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G12/VM1 Water supplies NZBC G12/AS1 Water supplies NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 1730 Washbasins AS/NZS 2023 Baths for ablutionary purposes AS/NZS 3500.1:2003 Plumbing and drainage - water services AS/NZS 3500.2:2003 Plumbing and drainage - sanitary plumbing and drainage AS/NZS 3662 Performance of showers for bathing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Caroma Industries New Zealand Ltd Mercer Products Ltd Copies of the above literature are available from ~
Requirements
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.caroma.co.nz www.mercers.co.nz www.methven.com
Email: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]
Telephone: 09 279 2700 - caroma 021 945 444 - mercer 021 745 335 - methven
Facsimile: 0800 423 825 - caroma 0800 2 637 237 - mercer 07 574 6606 - methven
Plumbers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a Certifying Plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
1.5 SAMPLES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 132
Submit samples on request of nominated tapware, along with the relevant manufacturers' technical literature for review.
A specialist in the supply of tapware, and employing experienced architectural representatives available to assist during the course of the installation.
1.6 SUPPLIER
2 PRODUCTS
Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.1 SANITARY FIXTURES
Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.2 TAPWARE
Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.3 SANITARY APPLIANCES
Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.4 SANITARY ACCESSORIES
Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 2.5 ELECTRICAL SANITARY ACCESSORIES
Conditions - sanitary fixtures
3 EXECUTION
Only deliver to the site fixtures or fittings that can be immediately unloaded into suitable storage or be placed for direct installation.
3.1 DELIVERY
Take delivery of and store components complete with protective casings and coverings in areas that are enclosed, clean and dry and where no work is being done. Remove protection only to the extent that will allow installation.
3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Installation work to comply with NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC G13/AS1 and the fixture manufacturer's requirements.
3.3 QUALITY STANDARDS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1
Ensure substrate and fixings will allow work of the specified standard. 3.4 SUBSTRATE
Do not proceed if the points of supply and drainage services do not match the points of the fixtures without force or distortion.
3.5 CO-ORDINATION
Install to NZBC G1/AS1, NZBC G12/VM1, NZBC G12/AS1, NZBC G13/AS1, NZBC E3/AS1 and to the fixture manufacturer's installation requirements for each component. Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries and sealants in sequence. Seal between all sanitary fixtures and wall linings, fixtures and the tops they are in, the tops and wall linings, to NZBC E3/AS1, 3.2.2. Fixtures include baths, basins, tubs or sinks, Tops include, vanities, bath surrounds, sink benches, etc, and there upstands.
3.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING NZBC G13/AS1
Confirm fixing points needed for each unit and provide solid blocking at each fixing bracket location.
Conditions - tapware
3.7 PROVIDE SUPPORT
Retain tapware in the manufacturer's original packaging and ensure that units are complete with fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately with its fitting name and space number.
3.8 RETAIN
3.9 STORE
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 133
Store tapware packages in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.
Conditions - sanitary accessories
Retain fixtures, fittings and hardware in the manufacturer's original packaging and ensure that units are complete with associated fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately to match the submitted and approved schedule.
3.10 RETAIN
Package fixtures, fittings and hardware units required in clear plastic and label each to match the drawings and the submitted schedule. Place packages in cartons selected for 'level', 'location', and/or 'sector' and label the packages and the cartons similarly.
3.11 PACKAGE
Store items in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Provide supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.
3.12 STORE
Before starting the installation of proprietary items, check relevant spaces and wall and floor finishes for any condition that would not allow the proper installation of any unit. Do not proceed until such conditions have been remedied.
Installation - sanitary fixtures
3.13 INSPECTION
Carry out preparatory and assembly work, including connections to supply and drainage services and the application of slurries/bedding and sealants in sequence. Fit the toilet pan in position, plumb, level, flush and rigid without stressing the attachment points of the component. Fixings to be corrosive resistant. Fit seat.
3.14 INSTALLING TOILET PAN
Fit firmly in place and connect the specified cisterns from the supply services through the flush pipes to the relative fixtures in the positions as detailed all plumb and level.
Installation - Basins
3.15 INSTALLING CISTERNS
Install to NZBC G1/AS1, AS/NZS 1730. Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed and to comply with NZBC E3/AS1. Connect to supply and drains through trap to the drainage system.
3.16 INSTALLING WASHBASINS
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Cut out basin profile to basin manufacturer's template. Make penetrations for supply and drainage. Fix securely with corrosive resistant fixings. Seal top and upstand to wall surface to comply with NZBC E3/AS1.
Installation - Showers
3.17 INSTALLING VANITIES - BLANK TOP
Shower waste, mixer and rose to be install to NZBC G1/AS1 and to AS/NZS 3662. 3.18 INSTALLING SHOWER FITTINGS
Install in accordance with NZBC E3/AS1. Sit tray firmly in place as detailed, to levels shown and connect to drainage service, ready for following work. Fit screen and door unit to manufacturer's details. Lining materials and finishes to comply with NZBC E3/AS1.
Installation - Sinks
3.19 INSTALLING SHOWER ENCLOSURES AND WALL LININGS
Install in accordance with manufacturer's/supplier's requirements. Connect to supply and drainage services.
Installation - Miscellaneous
3.20 INSTALLING SINK BENCHES
Carry out preparatory work and fit elements in position plumb, level, flush and rigid without stressing the attachment points in sequence. Connect to supply and drainage services.
3.21 INSTALLING STAINLESS STEEL FIXTURES
3.22 INSTALLING SANITARY FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES - PEOPLE WITH DISABILITIES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 134
Install fixtures to NZBC G1/AS1: Part 3 and Part 4 and to comply with the relevant layouts shown in Figures 5,6,7,8 and 9. Provide number of facilities in accordance with NZBC G1/AS1 tables 1, and 2.
Application - tapware
To AS/NZS 3500.1 dated 2003 and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Maintain safe water temperatures to comply with NZBC G12/AS1.
Application - sanitary accessories
3.23 GENERAL
Fit specified fittings firmly in place at required dimensions relative to floor and adjoining sanitaryware fittings, all plumb and level.
3.24 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
Locate units at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings, or as required to comply with NZBC G1/AS1. For any dimension not shown or known, request direction before proceeding.
3.25 LOCATE
Where cutting and fitting of the substrate is necessary for installing any unit, carry out this work before the painting or finishing of that surface. Remove any hardware when required for painting, placing it in the packaging or carton originally supplied and returning it to the secure store until ready for re-installation.
3.26 CUTTING AND FITTING
Install each unit in accordance with the proprietary fixture manufacturer's requirements, using the templates and tools supplied or recommended by them. Set units level, plumb and true to line and required location, with moving parts and actions freely and easily operating. Do not make any modifications to supplied units.
Completion
3.27 INSTALLING UNITS
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.28 REPLACE
Leave fixtures, fittings and accessories clean and unblemished with stickers and protective coverings removed, with supply and drainage connections and all parts fully operating and working. Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish required for following work.
3.29 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.30 REMOVE
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 TOILET - STANDARD
Location: W.C.'s, Shower room Toilet pan: Caroma Opal 2000 Smartflush Trap type: S trap Toilet seat: Caroma Pedigree ll Flush system: Close coupled cistern Isolating valve: Required
4.2 TOILET - DISABLED ACCESS ROOM
Location: Disabled access W.C. Toilet pan: Caroma Trident Sovereign Care toilet suite Trap type: S trap Toilet seat: Pressalit seat Flush system: Separate cistern Isolating valve: Required
4.3 BASIN - DISABLED ACCESS ROOM
Location: Disabled access W.C. Basin: Caroma Concorde 500 wall basin Basin taps/mixer: Methven Futura FT basin mixer Waste/plug: Chromed brass Trap: P/S trap - White plastic Isolating valve: Required
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 135
4.4 VANITY UNIT - BLANK TOP
Location: W.C's, Shower room Vanity: Caroma Centro Vanity basin Basin taps/mixer: Methven Futura FT basin mixer Colour: White
4.5 SHOWER ENCLOSURE
Location: Shower room Shower tray: Walk in shower Liner: Serratone Door: Curtain on pvc hooks Trap/waste: Easy clean trap Shower set: Triton T80Z Fast-Fit Electric Shower system (Parex Industries Ltd)
4.6 KITCHEN COMBINED SINK AND DRAINER
Location: Staff room Sink drainer model: Mercer Seattle - MSS 950-1 Mixer: Methven Promix Sink Mixer Waste/plug: Chromed brass Trap: P/S trap - White plastic Isolating valves: Required
Taps not related to and separate from sanitary fixtures:
4.7 TAPWARE - MISCELLANEOUS
Hose tap external: Methven Hose Tap Male
4.8 SANITARY ACCESSORIES
Location: All W.C.'s, Shower room Roll holder: Caroma Liano Toilet Roll holder Towel ring: Caroma Liano Towel Ring
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES Page 136
7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS
This section relates to Marley rainwater disposal systems. It includes;
� uPVC downpipes Refer to drawing 1535 GA.30 New Ext Elevations
1 GENERAL
Refer to 4311D Dimond Profiled Metal Roofing
Documents
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 4020 Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Marley Rainwater Brochures Marley Product Catalogue Marley uPVC spouting and downpipes - Your easy installation guide Manufacturer/supplier contact details
WARRANTIES
1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: Marley New Zealand Limited Web: www.marley.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 MARLEY (0800 627 539)
Provide a material manufacturer/supplier Guarantee:
� Commence the guarantee from the date of purchase � Refer to Marley NZ Guarantee available at www.marley.co.nz
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
15 years: Against defects in material and manufacture
Provide an installer/applicator warranty:
� When installed to Marley's published installation instructions at time of installation. � Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. � Workmanship warranty to be issued separately by the installer � Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.
Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER/APPLICATOR
3 years: For installation
Installers to be experienced, competent workers familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Marley systems, components and associated products listed in this section.
Performance
1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 137
Test the completed Marley rainwater disposal system with water to ensure, spouting is laid to correct fall, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spoutings.
1.8 TEST
Layout, falls and capacity of spouting to falls and the size and position of downpipes to comply with NZBC E1/AS1.
1.9 DESIGN
Materials
2 PRODUCTS
Marley uPVC spouting and downpipe systems in white uPVC.
Products
2.1 UPVC WHITE SPOUTING/DOWNPIPES
Marley downpipes system, complete with Marley fittings including bends, clips, joiners and junctions supplied by Marley. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.
Components
2.2 MARLEY DOWNPIPES
Only Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement to be used in conjunction with the spouting and downpipe systems to manufacturer's instructions. Colour match to spouting or downpipes.
2.3 MARLEY MCS SOLVENT WELDING CEMENT
Special items can be fabricated by Marley to specific dimensions on request including but not limited to angle flats, angle rakes, outlets and adaptors.
2.4 FABRICATION
Conditions
3 EXECUTION
Handle and store Marley downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Store out of direct sunlight. Refer to Marley installation guides for further details.
3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE
Check that fascias, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment. Do not proceed until they are up to standard.
3.2 SUBSTRATE
Make adequate provision in the jointing of the spouting for thermal movement in the length of the spouting by using Marley expansion joiners and/or expansion outlets. Refer to Marley expansion technical information.
3.3 THERMAL MOVEMENT
Marley Spouting and Downpipe systems are suitable for most environmental conditions and will never rust, rot or corrode.
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL
All Marley manufactured spouting and downpipe systems are 100% recyclable and Marley operates recycling programs with industry suppliers where uPVC pipes can be returned from site for recycling at Marley.
Application
3.5 RECYCLING
Install to Marley's current published installation instructions available at www.marley.co.nz. Ensure that all joints are sealed properly using Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement. Assemble downpipes, solvent cement jointed complete, fit to outlets, fix with pipe clips every 1.5 metres, fix pipe clips with 304 stainless steel screws, plumb and discharging into the stormwater gully or pipe inlet to the Marley required practice.
Painting Marley uPVC spouting/downpipes
3.6 INSTALL MARLEY DOWNPIPES
After installation use a mineral based undercoat and two coats of 100% weatherable acrylic paint. Do not paint the inside of spouting or internal brackets.
3.7 PAINTING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 138
Completion
Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.8 REPLACE
Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater system and free of all debris. Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.
3.9 LEAVE
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.10 REMOVE
For further details on selections go to www.marley.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.
uPVC system
4 SELECTIONS
Painting
4.1 MARLEY UPVC DOWNPIPES
Manufacturer: Marley Profile/type: Round RP65 Size: 65mm Colour: White Bracket type: Stand-off bracket
4.2 PAINTING
Brand/type: Resene Lumbersider Finish/colour: To be confirmed
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS Page 139
7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS
This section relates to above ground gravity flow sanitary systems;
� for foul water � from sanitary fixtures to first underground drain connection � including system wastes, floor wastes, floor waste gullies, traps, vents and valves � with associated components and accessories to make the system work
Refer to drawings 1535 GA.11 New Foundation / Drainage Plan and GA.12 New Floor Plan - References
1 GENERAL
Refer to 7151 SANITARY FIXTURES, TAPWARE & ACCESSORIES for sanitary fixtures tapware and accessories. Refer to 7430 DRAINAGE for underground drains.
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
Documents referred to in this section are:
Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC G1/AS1 Personal hygiene NZBC G13/AS1 Foul water - Sanitary plumbing NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and drainage AS 2887 Plastic waste fittings AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications AS/NZS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Marley New Zealand Ltd Copies of the above literature are available by phoning 09 279 2799
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying plumber under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCTS
PVC-U pipe to AS/NZS 1260 complete with fittings brand-matched to the pipe manufacturer's requirements. 2.1 PVC-U WASTE, DISCHARGE AND VENT PIPES
White polybutylene or PVC, including all associated fittings. 2.2 EXPOSED PIPES AND TRAPS
3 EXECUTION
Carry out this work and complete all tests to NZBC G1/AS1: 2.0, 3.0 and NZBC G13/AS1. 3.1 EXECUTION GENERALLY - NZBC G13/AS1
Avoid electrolytic action by eliminating actual contact or continuity of water between dissimilar metals. 3.2 ELECTROLYTIC ACTION
Connect waste outlets to traps and run waste pipes and back vents concealed, sized and fixed to NZBC G13/AS1 and AS/NZS 2032. Discharge wastes into the drainage system stack, soil pipe, or gully trap as shown. Bird proof mesh to all roof vents and vermin proof mesh to all untrapped waste pipes.
3.3 INSTALL TRAPS, WASTE AND VENT PIPES - NZBC G13/AS1
At penetrations through constructions provide and fit collars and escutcheon plates to match pipework. 3.4 PENETRATIONS
Test soil and waste disposal systems to ensure no leakage exists and leave in proper working order. 3.5 TEST
3.6 CLEAN UP
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS Page 140
Remove labels and clean fittings. Remove unused materials from the site.
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 PVC-U WASTE, DISCHARGE AND VENT PIPES
Brand/type: Marley - Drain, waste and vent sizes as shown on drawing 1535 GA.11
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7420 SANITARY SYSTEMS Page 141
7430 DRAINAGE
This section relates to the supply and laying of gravity foul water (sewage), stormwater and groundwater drainage. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.11 New Foundation / Drainage Plan
1 GENERAL
Documents referred to in this section are:
Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006
1.1 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO
NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water NZBC G13/AS2 Foul Water NZBC G13/AS3 Plumbing and Drainage AS/NZS 1254 PVC-U pipes and fittings for Stormwater and Surface Water applications AS/NZS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications AS/NZS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems AS/NZS 2033 Installation of Polyethylene pipe systems AS 2439.1 Perforated Plastics Drainage and Effluent Pipes and Fittings - Perforated
drainage pipe and associated fittings AS/NZS 2566.1 Buried Flexible Pipelines - Structural Design AS/NZS 2566.2 Buried Flexible Pipelines - Installation NZS 3104 Specification for concrete production NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings AS/NZS 5065 Polyethylene and polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage and
sewerage applications
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Marley New Zealand Ltd Copies of the above literature are available from ~
1.2 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS
Web: www.marley.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 279 2799 Facsimile: 09 279 2798
Supply a 1:100 scale as-built drawing of drains and fittings to the territorial authority and to the owner on completion.
1.3 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
Drainlayers to be experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified. Carry out all work under the direct supervision of a certifying drainlayer under the Plumbers, Gasfitters and Drainlayers Act 2006.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCTS
17.5 MPa prescribed mix to NZS 3104. 2.1 CONCRETE
Plain round and/or deformed steel bars, Grade 300 to AS/NZS 4671. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT
PVC-U pipes bends, junctions, fittings and joints to AS/NZS 1254 and AS/NZS 1260. Underground PVC-U pipe to be Classified as follows:
2.3 PVC-U PIPES
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 142
Classification Use SN4 - SN6 Domestic & light load areas SN8 - SN10 Commercial & Industrial medium load areas
To NZBC G13/AS2: 3.3 Gully traps, complete with grating. 2.4 GULLY TRAPS - NZBC G13/AS2
Cast iron frame with lift-up grating. 2.5 SURFACE WATER SUMP GRATINGS
Cast iron frame with screw-down cover. 2.6 INSPECTION COVERS
2.7 TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL - NZBC G13/AS2 & NZBC E1/AS1
Bedding: Clean granular non-cohesive material with a maximum particle size of 20 mm.
Bedding & surround: Clean granular non-cohesive material with a maximum particle size of 20 mm.
Compacted selected fill: Any Fine grain soil or granular material which is free from topsoil and rubbish and has a maximum particle size of 20 mm.
Ordinary fill: Excavated material. Concrete: 75 mm thick concrete pad.
Free draining crushed stone, 7 mm to 20 mm in size. 2.8 DRAINAGE MATERIAL
3 EXECUTION
Excavate for drains to a firm even base with correct gradients set in straight runs. Trenches running parallel, below and close to foundations of buildings to NZS 3604 or NZS 4229 to be separated to:
� NZBC E1/AS1, 3.9.7, Proximity of Trench to Building, for stormwater and subsoil drains. � NZBC G13/AS2, 5.6, Proximity of Trench to Building, for foul water drains.
3.1 EXCAVATE
All drainage installations to the pipe and fitting manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS
Carry out drainage work and tests to NZBC G13/AS2 (foul water), NZBC E1/AS1 (stormwater). Lay uPVC pipe systems to relevant sections of AS/NZS 2032, NZS 2566.1 and AS/NZS 2566.2. Lay polyethylene pipes and fittings to relevant sections of AS/NZS 2033 and NZS 2566.1.
3.3 DRAINAGE GENERALLY - NZBC G13/AS2 & NZBC E1/AS1
Lay drains in straight runs to correct gradients, to discharge into the network utility operator's sewer. Set inspection fittings on a concrete base.
3.4 LAY FOUL WATER DRAINS
Set on concrete 50mm above the surrounding ground or paving and brought up to protect the top of the fitting. Trowel off.
3.5 INSTALL GULLY TRAPS
Confirm the required location of downpipes and finished ground levels before commencing pipework. Set downpipe bends in concrete with the concrete brought up to protect the top of the bend from damage. Lay drains in straight runs to correct gradients to discharge into the network utility operator's stormwater system.
3.6 LAY STORMWATER DRAINS
To NZBC E1/AS1, complete with ceramic half-siphon pipe and cast iron frame with a lift out grating. 3.7 INSTALL SURFACE WATER SUMP
Construct as detailed on a poured concrete footing to NZBC E1/AS1, 3.7, Access for maintenance. Provide all necessary haunching to channels. Fit a cast iron cover and frame.
3.8 INSTALL STORMWATER INSPECTION CHAMBERS
Construct as detailed on a poured concrete footing to NZBC G13/AS2, 5.7 Access points. Provide all necessary haunching to channels. Fit a cast iron cover and frame.
3.9 INSTALL FOUL WATER INSPECTION CHAMBERS - NZBC G13/AS2
3.10 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 143
Concrete encase shallow drains and drains under driveways, on a 100mm deep 17.5 MPa concrete bed reinforced with three 10mm mild steel bars. Surround pipes with a polythene membrane to allow movement and encase in 100mm 17.5 MPa concrete.
Field test drains for watertightness (PVC-U to AS/NZS 2032 or AS/NZS 2566. 2 Appendix N) to the satisfaction of the territorial authority inspector.
3.11 FIELD TEST
Granular bedding and selected fill shall be placed in layers no greater than 100 mm loose thickness and compacted. Base bedding (beneath the pipe) shall be placed and compacted before pipes are laid. Up to 300mm above the pipe, compaction shall be by tamping by hand using a rod with a pad foot (having an area of 75 ± 25 mm by 75 ± 25 mm) over the entire surface of each layer to produce a compact layer without obvious voids, without disturbing the drains. More than 300 mm above the pipe, compaction shall be by at least four passes of a mechanical tamping foot compactor (whacker type) with a minimum weight of 75 kg.
3.12 PLACING & COMPACTING TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL
Place and rake in bedding material so as to support the pipe once laid. Embedment material shall be placed uniformly along and around the pipe to ensure uniform density of side support and overlay with no distortion, dislodgment or damage to the pipeline. Following placement, the embedment material shall be compacted in layers to uniformly support the pipe. Trench fill material shall be placed on the pipe embedment and compacted to fill the trench, with care taken to avoid impact loading of the pipe.
3.13 PLACING & COMPACTING TRENCH BACKFILLING MATERIAL FOR PVC-U PIPE
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 PVC-U PIPES
Brand/type: Marley uPVC drains
4.2 ACCESS POINTS
Brand: Marley Type: Small access chambers, inspection chambers, rodding points and
inspection points
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7430 DRAINAGE Page 144
7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC
This section relates to the wiring for domestic and small scale commercial installations, including:
� power � lighting � electrically-powered fittings
Refer to drawings 1535 GA.16, 18 and the lighting drawings
1 GENERAL
Refer to 7123KP Kembla Pex Hot and Cold Water System Refer to 7151 Sanitary Fixtures, Tapware and accessories - Shower Hot Water Heater Refer to 7811 Communications Cabling
1.1 RELATED WORK
Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:
Documents
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
CFL compact fluorescent lamp ELV extra low voltage GLS general lighting service IP international (ingress) protection classification LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode MCB miniature circuit breaker NUO Network Utility Operator PCB printed circuit board PIR passive infrared RCBO residual current-operated circuit breaker with over current protection RCCB residual current-operated circuit breakers RCD residual current device SIA security integration architecture TPS tough plastic sheathed TCF Telecommunications Carriers' Forum
Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:
1.3 DOCUMENTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 145
Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice 2011
NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F6/AS1 Visibility in escape routes NZBC F7/AS1 Warning systems NZBC G4/AS1 Ventilation NZBC G9/AS1 Electricity AS/NZS 1125 Conductors in insulated electric cables and flexible cord AS/NZS 1768 Lightning protection AS/NZS 2201.1 Intruder alarm systems - Client's premises - Design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance AS 2293.1 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - System design,
installation and operation AS 2293.3 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings - Emergency
escape luminaires and exit signs AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring
Rules) AS/NZS 3008.1.2 Electrical installations - Selection of cables - Cables for alternating
voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV - Typical New Zealand installation conditions
AS/NZS 3100 Approval and test specification-general requirements for electrical equipment
AS/NZS 3112 Approval and test specification - Plugs and socket-outlets AS/NZS 3113 Approval and test specification - Ceiling roses AS/NZS 3190 Approval and test specification - Residual current devices (current-
operated earth-leakage devices) AS/NZS 3350.1 Safety of household and similar electrical appliances - General
requirements AS/NZS 3439.3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Particular
requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use - Distribution boards
AS 3786 Smoke alarms NZS 4514 Interconnected smoke alarms for houses AS/NZS 5000.2 Electric cables - Polymeric insulated - for working voltages up to and
including 450/750v AS/NZS 60598.2.2 Luminaires - Particular requirements - Recessed luminaires IEC 61643 Components for low voltage surge protection devices
Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: PDL Electrical Products Manufacturer/supplier contact details
Warranties
1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS
Company: PDL Electrical Products Web: www.pdl.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 101 152
Warrant the complete electrical installation under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution.
Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.
Requirements
1.5 WARRANTY
1 year: Warranty period
Comply with the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010, AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3008.1.2 and TCF Premises Wiring Code of Practice for listed and prescribed work and with the utility network operator's requirements. Apply for the service connection. Arrange for the required inspections of listed work. Pay all fees.
1.6 COMPLY
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 146
Carry out work under the supervision of an electrical licensed supervisor.
Before installation work commences provide a declaration of conformity. The declaration of conformity is to comply with the Electrical (Safety) Regulations (2010), regulations 57 and 58. It must be signed by the designer of the installation.
1.8 SAFETY OF INSTALLATION - DESIGN BY ELECTRICIAN
Supply a certificate of compliance (CoC) to the owner, and if required the NUO, as required by the Electricity (Safety) Regulations (2010), prior to connection.
� Arrange for the NUO to inspect before the meter installation, listed work inspection, polarity check and supply becoming live.
� Arrange for an inspector to inspect as required by regulation 70.
1.9 ELECTRICAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
Provide an Electrical Safety Certificate (ESC), as required by the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010, to the owner and when required the BCA. To be provided at completion of the work, prior to Practical Completion.
1.10 ELECTRICAL SAFETY CERTIFICATE
2 PRODUCTS
Tough plastic sheathed neutral screened cable to AS/NZS 4961 and AS/NZS 3008.1.2, with a minimum rating of 60 amps per phase. Include pilot cable where required by network utility company.
2.1 MAINS SUPPLY, SINGLE PHASE
Tough plastic sheathed copper conductors to AS/NZS 5000.2, stranded above 1.0mm², and to AS/NZS 3008.1.2. Minimum sizes as below. Increase sizes if the method of installation, thermal insulation, cable length or load will reduce the cable rating below that of the MCB rating, or produce an excessive voltage drop.
Heat resistant cable for final connections to all heated appliances, and high temperature cable in ambient conditions that may be above 35°C.
2.2 CABLES
Lighting circuits: Domestic: 1.5mm² on 10 amp MCBs Lighting circuits: Commercial: 1.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs Power circuits: 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic and unenclosed or unfilled cavity
construction 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for domestic insulated construction, or filled
cavity 2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs for unenclosed or unfilled cavity construction 2.5mm² on 16 amp MCBs for insulated construction, or filled cavity, or
lengths over 30 metres Hot water cylinder circuits: Single phase: 2.5mm² on 20 amp MCBs Range/oven/hob circuits: Single phase: 6mm² on 32 amp MCBs
Flush surface mount boards manufactured to AS/NZS 3439.3 and installed in accordance with AS/NZS 3000. Manufactured from engineering grade resin with a glow wire rating of 850°C, complete with neutral and earth busbars, and insulated comb phase bar. Distribution boards to have 20% spare capacity for future additions and alterations.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION BOARD
General requirements including main switch 63A or 100A. Residual current protection 30mA, ensure RCCBs' meet Type A and comply with AS/NZS 3190. MCBs to 4.5kA or 6kA rated.
2.4 CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Standard grid size or equivalent to be manufactured from plastic or metal, with 2 or more gang size to be metal with steel inserts for accessory securing screws. Screw fixed.
2.5 WALL BOXES
Single pole switches to be 16 amp minimum rated, double pole or intermediate to be 16 amp minimum rated. All switches to be 230 volt a.c. polycarbonate flushplate units. Refer to drawings/schedules for number of switches per unit, dimmer units, neon (indicator or toggle) units and 2 way units.
2.6 SWITCH UNITS
One way 20 amp switch complete with cable clamp for flexible PVC conduit to element enclosure. 2.7 HOT WATER SYSTEM SWITCH
10 amp, 230 volt flat 3 pin socket outlets fitted with safety shutters and manufactured to AS/NZS 3100, AS/NZS 3112 and AS/NZS 3113, single or multi gang as detailed.
2.8 SWITCHED SOCKET UNITS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 147
Protection for the homes appliances with IEC 61643 Class ll surge protection devices fitted to the switchboard. For variable electronic equipment fit IEC 61643 Class lll surge protection to switched socket outlets.
2.9 SURGE PROTECTION
White plastic mounting base with screwed cover, manufactured to AS/NZS 3113. Terminal type. Cylindrical section TPS for suspended fittings.
2.10 CEILING ROSES
Standard white plastic bayonet cap, with cap angled where wall mounted. Brass liners. 2.11 BATTEN HOLDERS
Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge fittings with low loss control gear and power factor corrected to 0.95 minimum. Control gear suitable for dimming if this is required. All fittings complete with lamps; Incandescent GLS lamps pearl, coiled-coil 230v rated, bayonet cap; Fluorescent triphosphor 2700K; CFL; halogen ELV 12v dichroic reflector with cover glass unless detailed otherwise.
2.12 LIGHT FITTINGS
Ceiling, wall or duct mounted exhaust fans for ventilation to NZBC G4/AS1, and compliant with AS/NZS 3350.1. 2.13 EXHAUST FANS
3 EXECUTION
Lay underground mains to the NUO requirements. Excavate trench, install cable and marker tape and backfill. 3.1 MAIN SUPPLY
Fit to AS/NZS 3000 and board manufacturer's requirements. Recess into wall or surface mount and ensure fire containment properties of the enclosure are maintained.
3.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Install MCBs at distribution board to AS/NZS3000 to protect each final sub circuit. 3.3 CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Bond together and to earth all plumbing fittings not adequately isolated, to AS/NZS 3000, the Electricity (Safety) Regulations 2010 and the fitting manufacturer's requirements.
3.4 EARTH BONDS
Provide a plastic toby box to contain and protect the earth electrode. Fix the connecting earth wiring closely and securely against wall surfaces.
3.5 MAIN EARTH
Install RCD protection to AS/NZS 3000. 3.6 EARTH LEAKAGE PROTECTION
Install 30mA RCDs at the distribution board for areas not covered in Domestic installations, or using fixed wired RCD protected socket outlets in areas that may represent increased risk of electric shock to the user:
� Wet areas: bathrooms, laundries, kitchens. � Near pools and water features. � Where intended for use with cleaning equipment. � Hand-held tools subject to movement in use, i.e. work-shops, garages.
3.7 HIGH RISK AREA INSTALLATIONS
The position of outlets and equipment shown on drawings is indicative of requirements. Confirm documents and site conditions are not in conflict with other services or features. Resolve conflicts and discrepancies before proceeding with work affected. Confirm on site the exact location, disposition and mounting heights of all outlets, fittings, equipment, penetrations, and use of exposed wiring. Fix outlet items level, plumb and in line.
3.8 SET-OUT
Install wiring systems to AS/NZS 3000. All cabling run concealed. No TPS cable laid directly in concrete. Locate holes in timber framing for the passage of cables at the centre line of the timber member. Install cable in conduits where required to pass through concrete or underground. In walls run cabling horizontally and vertically in straight lines. In ceilings either run cabling along ceiling framing or attached to catenary wires. Clip cabling to ceiling framing/catenary wires.
3.9 CABLING
Install all circuits with the appropriately rated cable and circuit protection. Install with a maximum of 8 light switch units or 4 double or single switched socket units on any circuit. Minimum 2 lighting circuits per floor. Separate circuits for all electric heating appliances. Kitchen sockets to be on at least two different circuits.
3.10 CABLING CIRCUITS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 148
Mount flush in cavity construction size to fit products selected. Fix vertically mounted wall boxes to studs. Screw fix horizontally mounted switched socket outlet wall boxes to solid blocking or nogs. Fix switch panel wall boxes to solid blocking.
3.11 WALL BOXES
Fit all single and double switch units, all sockets to the following heights (to the centre of the unit) unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
Mount light switches and switch socket outlets vertically and socket units horizontally. Label all switch units that control electrical equipment or special lighting circuits by colour filled engraving on the switch. Use proprietary engraved switch mechanisms where applicable.
3.12 SWITCH AND SOCKET UNITS
Switch Units: 1150mm above finished floor Socket Units: 150mm above work benches 400mm above finished floor
Locate isolating switches in positions as confirmed by the owner, when not specifically shown on the drawings. 3.13 ISOLATING SWITCHES
Install light fittings in locations and at heights specified and confirmed by the owner, in accordance with the fitting manufacturer's requirements.
3.14 LIGHT FITTINGS
Use electronic transformers for ELV lamps, one transformer per lamp. Locate to manufacturer's requirements and as close as practicable to the lamp. Ensure transformers and rear of light fittings are adequately ventilated and clear of any thermal insulation, to AS/NZS 3000.
3.15 EXTRA LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING
Non-residential applications; The clearance between insulation and recessed downlights;
� Leave 100mm gap to AS/NZS 3000, figure 4.9 � Provide larger gaps where required by the downlight manufacturer
3.16 RECESSED LIGHT FITTINGS - CLEARANCE TO INSULATION
Wire as a separate circuit through a wall-mounted isolating switch, with the cable from switch to element encased in flexible PVC conduit, clamp fixed at each end. Hot water cylinders, thermostats and 3000 watt element supplied and fitted under the hot and cold water system section.
3.17 ELECTRIC HOT WATER SYSTEM
Install surge protection devices to manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and AS/NZS 1768. When fitting IEC 61643 Class ll protection at the switchboard, protect the device by a dedicated MCB.
3.18 SURGE PROTECTION
Install and wire fittings and equipment to individual fittings and equipment manufacturer's requirements. Refer to the drawings for required layouts and locations for equipment. Refer to SELECTIONS for schedules of fittings.
3.19 ELECTRIC POWERED FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT
Include label under each controller, switch and circuit breaker on distribution boards. Include a warning notice if light dimmers are used in the installation. List the rating of each circuit.
Completion
3.20 LABELLING
Leave installation operating correctly, with equipment clean and operational. 3.21 COMPLETION
Materials
4 SELECTIONS
Confirm selections of all outlet fittings and hardware with the owner in writing before ordering. 4.1 SELECTIONS - FITTINGS AND HARDWARE
4.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 149
Outlets - fittings
Location: In New IT room Brand / type: PDL Electrcial Products - DBS surface mounted MCB: RCCB: RCBO: Surge protectors: Modular contactors: Main switch: Timers
4.3 INTERIOR OUTLETS
Item Brand / type Switch / socket outlets: PDL Electrcial Products Coverplate colour: Cream - To be confirmed
4.4 INTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS - REFER TO IDEAL DRAWINGS ATTACHED
Fitting Brand / type LED Light fittings:
4.5 EXTERNAL LIGHT FITTINGS - REFER TO IDEAL DRAWINGS ATTACHED
Fitting Brand / type Veranda lights:
4.6 BATHROOM FANS - REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES DOCUMENTS
Location Brand / type Bathroom Extracts:
4.7 WATER HEATERS
Item Brand / type HWC: Rheem 90 litre mains pressure electric Hot water for shower: Triton T80Z electric shower Hot water in kitchen: Rheem Laser Designer wall mounted unit - 5.0 litre
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7701 ELECTRICAL BASIC Page 150
7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
This section relates to generic structured communications cabling systems for commercial projects. Refer to drawing 1535 GA.16 New Electrical/Data Plan
Related work
1 GENERAL
Refer to 7701 Electrical Basic
Documents
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
Documents referred to in this section are:
Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.
Requirements
1.2 DOCUMENTS
NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring
Rules) AS/NZS 3080 Telecommunications installations - Integrated telecommunications cabling
systems for commercial premises AS/NZS 3084 Telecommunications installations - Telecommunications pathways and
spaces for commercial premises AS/NZS 3085.1 Telecommunications installations - Basic requirements AS/CA S009 Installation requirements for customer cabling (Wiring Rules)
Comply with AS/CA S009, AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 3080, AS/NZS 3084, AS/NZS°3085.1, and the manufacturer's requirements. Arrange for the required manufacturer's inspections of the listed work
1.3 COMPLY
Communications cabling installation to be carried out by competent workers experienced with the materials and in the techniques specified and accredited to work on the proposed manufacturer's system.
Warranties
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
Warrant this part of the work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution.
Refer to general section 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT for the required format and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.
1.5 WARRANTY
2 years: Warranty period
Manufacture's warranty for the performance of the system under normal environmental and use conditions against failure.
Provide this warranty on the manufacture's standard form.
1.6 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
2 years: Warranty
Components
2 PRODUCTS
All system components (distributors, cabling and outlets), where possible, to be of a common manufacturer and every component to meet the required level of performance.
2.1 COMMON COMPONENTS
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 151
Supply and install to the Telecommunications Service Provider's requirements 2.2 DEMARCATION FRAME
Wall mounted cable distributor or rack mounted 8-pin modular patch fields for incoming voice cables (1 pair terminated per jack) and outgoing outlet field cables (4 pair terminated per jack). Provide rack space and check that power outlets are provided and suitably located. Provide cable management rings and jumper bars. Minimum 30% spare space capacity in each field and overall rack capacity.
2.3 CABLE DISTRIBUTOR
Install equipment cords between the wall-mounted distributor and the equipment rack, or supply patch cords, for connecting between the equipment and the jack fields.
2.4 EQUIPMENT CORDS
2.5 OUTLETS
Telecommunications outlets:
100 ohm balanced category 6 - multiple outlets on common faceplates.
Outlet face plates: To match electrical socket outlet faceplates. Refer to SELECTIONS.
Aerial suitable for both VHF, UHF, analogue and digital reception, of all local free-to-air broadcast and pay channels.
2.6 TV AERIAL
Application
3 EXECUTION
Install to the manufacturer's requirements. 3.1 DISTRIBUTORS
Install to the manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 CABLES
Backbone cable: From demarcation point to distributor or enclosure. Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3), terminate one pair per jack.
From distributor or enclosure, to PABX. Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3), terminate one pair per jack.
Horizontal cable: 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6, per outlet, terminate 4 pair per jack.
Comply with AS/CA S009. Conceal all cables. Support all cables clear of hot and sharp surfaces without placing unnecessary strain on the cables or terminations. Earthed or insulated high tensile catenaries or cable trays in ceiling/floor cavities. Cable trays for greater than 24 cables in a common route. Cables run parallel to power cables separated by 300mm and cross at right angles with segregation. Do not share cable supports or penetrations with other services.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
Quantities and locations as drawn. Allow to move up to 2 metres prior to installation. Confirm all locations prior to installation. Mount at 400mm above finished floor level unless noted otherwise. Mount aligned with electrical socket outlets where present, separated at 100mm centres. Mount on Category 6 compliant skirting trunking where indicated.
3.4 OUTLETS
To AS/NZS 3080 and the manufacturer's requirements. 3.5 CONNECTING HARDWARE
Fix aerial, and ensure the system is suitable for high quality reception of all VHF, UHF, digital and satellite channels - Sky satellite TV installation practices minimum. Test to ensure adequate TV/video at every outlet with a RF field strength meter. Cable penetrations through the cladding to be weatherproofed to comply with NZBC E2/AS1.
Completion
3.6 TV AERIAL AND CABLING
At completion test to manufacturer's requirements and provide a certified copy of the results. Correct or replace any sub-standard items and re-test.
3.7 TESTING
To AS/NZS 3085.1. Common and consistent labelling on each outlet and at the Distributor. Machine made permanent labels. Arrange numbering sequentially by floor, then by room and then around the walls of each room.
3.8 LABELLING
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 152
Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. Jointing cables is not permitted - replace any damaged or short cables.
3.9 REPLACE DAMAGED WORK
Leave work clean, undamaged, in full working order and to the standard required by following procedures. 3.10 LEAVE CLEAN
Remove debris, unused materials and elements from inside enclosures and from the rest of the site. 3.11 REMOVE DEBRIS
MATERIALS - REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONSULTANTS SPECIFICATION
4 SELECTIONS
4.1 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING ENCLOSURES
Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:
~
4.2 DISTRIBUTORS
Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:
~
4.3 COMMUNICATIONS CABLES
Cable Manufacturer / Type Multi-pair voice grade (Category 3): ~ 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6: ~
4.4 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
Manufacturer: ~ Brand/catalogue number:
~ (8 position modular sockets)
Colour: ~
4.5 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Item Brand / type TV aerial: ~ TV aerial amplifier: ~ Satellite dish: ~
Judd Dougan - Team Architects Ltd Kennedy Park Reception Project 117833
© CIL Masterspec Jan 2016 7811 COMMUNICATIONS CABLING Page 153